ME61 315 R03a

GAUGING SYSTEMS
OSP-P300S/P300M/P300S-R/P300M-R
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
(3rd Edition)
Pub No. 6130-E-R2 (ME61-315-R3) Nov. 2014
6130-E P-(i)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine itself from
hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively on these safety
devices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented below to ensure accident-
free operation.
This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards which
Okuma can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.
1. Precautions Relating to Installation

(1) Please be noted about a primary power supply as follows.
 Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a major
noise source (for example, an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since this
could cause malfunction of the CNC unit.
 If possible, connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there is
no choice but to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a large
amount of noise (such as an electric welder or electric discharge machine).
(2) Installation Environment

Observe the following points when installing the control enclosure.
 Make sure that the CNC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight.
 Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil.
 Make sure that the control enclosure and operation panel are not subject to excessive
vibrations or shock.
 The permissible ambient temperature range for the control enclosure is 5 to 40°C (41 to
104°F).
 The permissible ambient humidity range for the control enclosure is related humidity 50%
or less at 40°C (104°F) (no condensation).
 The maximum altitude at which the control enclosure can be used is 1000 m (3281ft.).
2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power

(1) Close all the doors of the control enclosure and operation panel to prevent the entry of water,
chips, and dust.
(2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that there
are no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation.
(3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROL
ON switch on the operation panel.
6130-E P-(ii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3. Precautions Relating to Operation

(1) After turning on the power, carry out inspection and adjustment in accordance with the daily
inspection procedure described in this instruction manual.
(2) Use tools whose dimensions and type are appropriate for the work undertaken and the machine
specifications. Do not use badly worn tools since they can cause accidents.
(3) Do not, for any reason, touch the spindle or tool while spindle indexing is in progress since the
spindle could rotate: this is dangerous.
(4) Check that the workpiece and tool are properly secured.
(5) Never touch a workpiece or tool while it is rotating: this is extremely dangerous.
(6) Do not remove chips by hand while machining is in progress since this is dangerous. Always
stop the machine first, then remove the chips with a brush or broom.
(7) Do not operate the machine with any of the safety devices removed. Do not operate the
machine with any of the covers removed unless it is necessary to do so.
(8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool.
(9) Do not approach or touch any moving part of the machine while it is operating.
(10) Do not touch any switch or button with wet hands. This is extremely dangerous.
(11) Before using any switch or button on the operation panel, check that it is the one intended.
4. Precautions Relating to the ATC

(1) The tool clamps of the magazine, spindle, etc., are designed for reliability, but it is possible that
a tool could be released and fall in the event of an unforeseen accident, exposing you to
danger: do not touch or approach the ATC mechanism during ATC operation.
(2) Always inspect and change tools in the magazine in the manual magazine interrupt mode.
(3) Remove chips adhering to the magazine at appropriate intervals since they can cause
misoperation. Do not use compressed air to remove these chips since it will only push the chips
further in.
(4) If the ATC stops during operation for some reason and it has to be inspected without turning the
power off, do not touch the ATC since it may start moving suddenly.
5. On Finishing Work
(1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine.
(2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position.
(3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it.
(4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then the
main power disconnect switch.
6130-E P-(iii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

Trouble Occurs
In order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential to observe the
following points when performing maintenance inspections or during checking when trouble has
occurred.
(1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop the
machine.
(2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures need
to be taken.
(3) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.
(5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts.
(6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they were
and secure them properly with their screws, etc.
(7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltage
checks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated.
(8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the control enclosure or terminal box.
(9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause current
leakage and electric shocks.
(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure
a. Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the control enclosure door.
b. Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may some residual charge in
the MCS drive unit (servo/spindle), and for this reason only service personnel are permitted
to perform any work on this unit. Even then, they must observe the following precautions.
 MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)

The residual voltage discharges two minutes after the main switch is turned OFF.
c. The control enclosure contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit board
whose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. In order to ensure that the
contents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memory
is supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are
handled, the contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service
personnel should handle these boards.
6130-E P-(iv)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure
a. Cleaning the cooling unit

The cooling unit in the door of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive
temperature rise inside the control enclosure and increase the reliability of the NC unit.
Inspect the following points every three months.
 Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?

The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.
 Is the external air inlet blocked?

If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.
7. General Precautions
(1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy.
(2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficient
training.
(3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine
operators must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and goggles.
(4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct
procedure before operating the machine.
(5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at any
time and from any position.
(6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain high-
voltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous.
(7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
6130-E P-(v)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
8. Symbols Used in This Manual

The following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information of
particular importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.
6130-E P-(i)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL
BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION .................................................1
1-1. Overview............................................................................................................................ 1
1-1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging ........................................................................ 2
1-1-2. Function Menu..................................................................................................... 3
1-2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Operation.................. 9
1-2-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point ................................................................ 10
1-2-2. Setting the Pot No./Tool No. Table.................................................................... 16
1-2-3. Operation Mode Designation............................................................................. 17
1-2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function ............................................................. 19
1-2-5. Setting the Tool Change Position (Other Than MC-H)...................................... 23
1-2-6. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection.................................................................. 24
1-2-7. Cycle Time Reduction for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic
Tool Breakage Detection Cycle......................................................................... 29
1-2-8. New Cycle Time Reduction Function for Automatic Tool Length
Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle ............................................. 31
1-3. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for
Special Tools and Attachments ....................................................................................... 35
1-3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM............................................................... 35
1-3-2. Operation for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage
Detection on B/C-axis Attachments, 90° Angular Attachments and
Extension Attachments (Option)........................................................................ 42
1-3-3. Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage
Detection with 30° Angular Attachments (Option) ............................................. 51
1-4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)............................................. 87
1-4-1. Setting the Y-axis Escape Position ................................................................... 87
1-4-2. Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset (Cutter Radius
Compensation)/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle .............................. 88
1-5. Interference Prevention Measures for MCV-A/MCV-A II During Execution of
the Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle................. 90
1-5-1. Touch Sensor Operation Interlock..................................................................... 90
1-5-2. Measures against Interference during Execution of the Automatic
Tool Length Offset/Tool Breakage Detection Cycle .......................................... 90
1-6. Variables Used in Subprograms ...................................................................................... 92
1-6-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables................................................................ 92
1-6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools)......................... 95
1-6-3. How to Use Variables........................................................................................ 98
1-7. Cautions on Operation................................................................................................... 106
1-8. Program Examples ........................................................................................................ 109
6130-E P-(ii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-8-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset.......................................................................... 109

1-8-2. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection................................................................ 111
1-9. Alarm ............................................................................................................................. 114
1-9-1. Alarm List ........................................................................................................ 114
1-9-2. Gauging Impossible Cause Code List <Alarm B 2305> .................................. 115
SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION ................................................122

2-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 122
2-1-1. Dimension Check Function ............................................................................. 122
2-1-2. Automatic Zero Offset Function....................................................................... 122
2-2. Operation of the Automatic Gauging Function .............................................................. 123
2-2-1. Setting the Datum Ring Zero Point.................................................................. 124
2-2-2. Touch Probe Radius Compensation ............................................................... 126
2-2-3. Touch Probe Length Offset ............................................................................. 132
2-2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function ............................................................ 134
2-2-5. Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Function.......................................................... 136
2-2-6. End Face Gauging Cycle ................................................................................ 139
2-2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results.................................................................... 145
2-2-8. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two Points ............................. 146
2-2-9. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two End Faces ...................... 148
2-2-10. Automatic Zero Offset Function....................................................................... 151
2-2-11. Copying the Touch Probe Offset Data ............................................................ 152
2-3. Automatic Gauging Function for B-/C-axis, 90° Angular and Extension
Attachments (Option)..................................................................................................... 153
2-3-1. Automatic Gauging for 90° Angular Attachment and B-/C-axis
Attachment (PAB=90°) .................................................................................... 155
2-3-2. Automatic Gauging for Extension Attachment and B-/C-axis
Attachment (PAB=0°) ...................................................................................... 156
2-3-3. Automatic Gauging for MILLAC 800VH and MILLAC 1000VH........................ 157
2-4. Power ON/OFF Cycle of the Touch Probe .................................................................... 160
2-4-1. Power ON/OFF Cycle Operation..................................................................... 161
2-5. Details............................................................................................................................ 164
2-5-1. Touch Probe Movements ................................................................................ 164
2-5-2. Approach Speed to the Workpiece.................................................................. 167
2-5-3. Dwell Time in Work Gauging........................................................................... 169
2-5-4. Reducing Time before Movement of Touch Probe.......................................... 169
2-5-5. Variables Used in Subprograms...................................................................... 170
2-6. Touch Probe Safety Measures ...................................................................................... 184
2-6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation ............................................................. 184
2-6-2. Replacing the Touch Probe Battery ................................................................ 185
2-7. Supplementary Information ........................................................................................... 186
2-8. Program Examples ........................................................................................................ 188
2-8-1. ID Gauging ...................................................................................................... 188
2-8-2. OD Gauging .................................................................................................... 189
6130-E P-(iii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2-8-3. End Face Gauging on Z-axis........................................................................... 190

2-8-4. Distance between End Faces (X-axis direction).............................................. 191
2-8-5. Automatic Zero Offset ..................................................................................... 192
2-8-6. Example Program for MCM Horizontal Spindle............................................... 193
2-9. Examples of Gauging Result Display ............................................................................ 196
2-10. Alarm ............................................................................................................................. 199
2-10-1. Alarm List ........................................................................................................ 199
2-10-2. Gauging Impossible Cause Code Chart (Alarm B 2305)................................. 201
SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE .................................................208

3-1. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 208
3-2. Parameters .................................................................................................................... 208
3-2-1. NC Optional Parameter Bit.............................................................................. 208
3-3. Designation of Displaying Device .................................................................................. 208
3-4. Print Command.............................................................................................................. 209
3-4-1. System Variables for Printing .......................................................................... 209
SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING..........................................................................211

4-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 211
4-1-1. Specifications .................................................................................................. 211
4-1-2. Outline of manual gauging function................................................................. 211
4-2. Preparation for Gauging ................................................................................................ 216
4-2-1. Preparation for workpiece gauging.................................................................. 216
4-2-2. Preparation for tool length gauging ................................................................. 220
4-2-3. Preparation for tool radius gauging ................................................................. 222
4-3. Work Gauging................................................................................................................ 225
4-3-1. Angle measurement ........................................................................................ 226
4-3-2. End face measurement ................................................................................... 227
4-3-3. Corner (right angle and free angle) measurement .......................................... 229
4-3-4. Circle (ID and OD) measurement.................................................................... 230
4-3-5. Center between end faces (inside and outside) measurement ....................... 232
4-3-6. Level difference measurement ........................................................................ 234
4-3-7. Angle and center between two circles (ID and OD) measurement ................. 235
4-3-8. Center between three circles (ID and OD) measurement ............................... 238
4-3-9. Intersection and center between four circles (ID and OD)
measurement .................................................................................................. 240
4-3-10. Measurement result......................................................................................... 242
4-4. Tool Length Gauging ..................................................................................................... 243
4-5. Cutter Radius Gauging .................................................................................................. 246
4-6. Error............................................................................................................................... 249
4-6-1. Error List.......................................................................................................... 249
6130-E P-(iv)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION .............................................250

5-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 250
5-1-1. Specifications .................................................................................................. 250
5-1-2. Outline of interactive gauging function ............................................................ 251
5-2. Setting gauging parameter ............................................................................................ 255
5-2-1. Setting tool length gauging parameter ............................................................ 255
5-3. Preparation for Gauging ................................................................................................ 257
5-3-1. Preparation for workpiece gauging.................................................................. 257
5-3-2. Preparation for tool length gauging ................................................................. 261
5-4. Workpiece Gauging ....................................................................................................... 264
5-4-1. Angle measurement ........................................................................................ 265
5-4-2. End face measurement ................................................................................... 267
5-4-3. Corner (right angle and free angle) measurement .......................................... 268
5-4-4. Circle (ID and OD) measurement.................................................................... 269
5-4-5. Center between end faces (inside and outside) measurement ....................... 271
5-4-6. Level difference measurement ........................................................................ 273
5-4-7. Angle and center between two circles (ID and OD) measurement ................. 274
5-4-8. Center between three circles (ID and OD) measurement ............................... 276
measurement .................................................................................................. 278
5-4-10. Measurement result......................................................................................... 280
5-5. Tool Length Gauging ..................................................................................................... 281
5-6. NC parameters .............................................................................................................. 284
5-7. Error............................................................................................................................... 285
5-7-1. Error List.......................................................................................................... 285
SECTION 6 CONTINUOUS TOOL GAUGING FUNCTION ..................................286

6-1. Overview........................................................................................................................ 286
6-2. Gauging Flow ................................................................................................................ 287
6-3. Operation Flow .............................................................................................................. 288
6-4. Function Explanation ..................................................................................................... 292
6-4-1. CONTINUOUS GAUGING window ................................................................. 292
6-4-2. GAUGING PARAM window............................................................................. 297
6-4-3. FILTERING popup window.............................................................................. 300
6-4-4. SORT screen................................................................................................... 301
6-5. Operation of tool length offset ....................................................................................... 302
6-6. Operation of tool breakage detection ............................................................................ 304
6-7. Precautions.................................................................................................................... 306
6-8. Error............................................................................................................................... 306
SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION ..........................307

7-1. What is Non-contact Sensor? ........................................................................................ 307
6130-E P-(v)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7-2. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 308

7-3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode....................................................... 309
7-4. Maker’s Subprogram in the Fixed Sensor Mode ........................................................... 328
7-5. Maker’s Subprogram for Gauging a Vertical Spindle Tool in the Fixed Sensor
Mode.............................................................................................................................. 329
7-6. Maker’s Subprogram for Gauging a Horizontal Spindle Tool in the Fixed
Sensor Mode ................................................................................................................. 345
7-7. List of Alarms ................................................................................................................. 360
SECTION 8 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR

HORIZONTAL MC .............................................................................362
8-2. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 363
8-3. Gauging with the Fixed Sensor ..................................................................................... 363
8-4. Each Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor................................................ 364
8-5. List of Alarms ................................................................................................................. 382
SECTION 9 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC................383

9-1. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 383
9-2. Detailed Specifications .................................................................................................. 383
9-2-1. Parameter Setting ........................................................................................... 383
9-2-2. Setting Items ................................................................................................... 384
9-2-3. Barrier Range Setting Example....................................................................... 385
9-2-4. Barrier Alarm and Resetting Method ............................................................... 385
9-3. Alarms ........................................................................................................................... 386
9-3-1. Alarm A............................................................................................................ 386
SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR

MCR-AF.............................................................................................387
10-2. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 388
10-3. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor......................................................... 388
10-4. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for Gauging Vertical Spindle Tools with the Fixed
Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 389
10-5. List of Alarms ................................................................................................................. 408
SECTION 11 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/

45° AT................................................................................................409
11-2. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 410
11-3. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor......................................................... 411
11-4. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for 30°/45° AT Tool Gauging by the Fixed Sensor
.............. 412
6130-E P-(vi)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
11-5. List of Alarms ................................................................................................................. 431

6130-E P-1
SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION
SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/

AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE
DETECTION FUNCTION
1-1. Overview
The automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function automatically calculates
the tool offset data and detects breakage (chipping) of tools such as drills, taps, reamers and boring
bars.
The specifications of this function are classified into the following two types.
 Specifications for automatic tool length offset only, and
 Specifications for automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection
A touch sensor is mounted in the machine: a tool mounted in the spindle is brought into contact with
this touch sensor to determine the tool offset data and to detect if the tool has been broken.
For tools which are mounted and removed without using the ATC, refer to the section Tool
Management Function in the special specifications of the Operation Manual.
(1) Automatic Tool Length Offset

With the tool length offset function, the tool mounted in the spindle is brought into contact with
the touch sensor to calculate the tool length. A subprogram prepared for this purpose is used
for this operation.
(2) Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

With the automatic tool breakage detection function, the same contact detection cycle as used
for the tool length offset function is executed to obtain the tool length.
The function compares the obtained tool length with the tool length offset data stored in the
CNC memory to judge if the tool has been broken.
If the tool is found to have been broken, it is replaced with a spare tool.
6130-E P-2
1-1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging

Display the screen that displays the gauging result (GAUGING RESULTS screen) by following the
steps indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Select an operation mode (automatic, MDI, manual).
2 Press function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE).

The DISPLAY CHANGE window opens.
3 In the DISPLAY CHANGE window, select “GAUGING RESULTS”.
4 Press function key [F8] (CLOSE).

The GAUGING RESULTS screen, shown below, is displayed.
ME61315R0300300020001
6130-E P-3
1-1-2. Function Menu

The function menu switches as shown below to display the functions relating to the gauging result
when the extend key, to the right of function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE), is pressed.
ME61315R0300300030001
When the extend key is pressed.
ME61315R0300300030002
The function menu relating to gauging result processing is described below.
Function Menu Description

TOOL/ZERO Displays the presently set zero offset/tool offset number.
MSB ZERO ON/OFF Displays the offset data presently set for the individual zero offset
numbers.
MSB TOOL ON/OFF Displays the offset data presently set for the tool length offset number
and the cutter diameter offset number.
SENSstat ON/OFF Displays the value set for system variable VNCOM and the sensor
contact status.
VARIOUS ON/OFF Displays the values set for the system variables.
For details on the function keys, refer to [TOOL/ZERO Function Key] to [VARIOUS ON/OFF
Function Key] in 1-1-2.
6130-E P-4
TOOL/ZERO Function Key
The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window displays the presently set zero offset number and tool offset
numbers. To display the TOOL/ZERO pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

For the procedure used to display the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to [1-1-1. Displaying
the Result of Gauging].
2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.
3 Press function key [F2] (TOOL/ZERO).

The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window opens.
ME61315R0300300040001
The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window closes when function key [F8] (CLOSE) is pressed.
6130-E P-5
MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key
The MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window displays the offset data set for the individual
zero offset numbers. To display the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window, follow the
procedure indicated below.
Procedure :

3 Press function key [F4] (MSB ZERO ON/OFF).

The MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window opens.
ME61315R0300300050001
The MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window closes when function key [F4] (MSB
ZERO ON/OFF) is pressed again.
6130-E P-6
MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key
The MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTTER RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N]) pop-
up window displays the offset data set for the individual tool length offset and cutter radius
compensation numbers. To display the MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTTER
RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :

3 Press function key [F5] (MSB TOOL ON/OFF).

The MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTTER RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N])
pop-up window opens.
ME61315R0300300060001
The MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTTER RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N])
pop-up window closes when function key [F5] (MSB TOOL ON/OFF) is pressed again.
6130-E P-7
SENSstat ON/OFF Function Key
The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window displays the values set for system
variables VNCOM and the contact status of the sensor. To display the NC COMMUNICATION
(VNCOM[N]) pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :

3 Press function key [F6] (SENSstat ON/OFF).

The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window opens.
ME61315R0300300070001
The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window closes when function key [F6]
(SENSstat ON/OFF) is pressed again.
6130-E P-8
VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key
The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window displays the values set for the individual system variables. To
display the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :

3 Press function key [F7] (VARIOUS ON/OFF).

The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window opens.
ME61315R0300300080001
The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window closes when function key [F7] (VARIOUS ON/OFF) is
pressed again.
6130-E P-9
1-2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Detection Operation
A general breakdown of the operational procedure for carrying out automatic tool length and tool
breakage detection functions is given below.
Zero point setting is necessary only when the
Setting the zero point for the machine is installed.
touch sensor (If higher gauging accuracy is required, however, you
are recommended to set the zero point occasionally.)
When the tools in the magazine are changed, it is
Setting the correspondence
necessary to rewrite the Pot No./Tool No. table in the
between pot numbers/tool
MAGAZINE INFO. sheet on the TOOL DATA screen.
numbers
Executing the automatic tool

Make sure that the tool length offset value is
length offset cycle with the tool
"0±0.005 mm" or "PLI setting±0.005mm".
used for setting the touch
sensor zero point
Call the tool whose tool length offset data is to be
set from the magazine and mount it in the spindle,
Executing automatic tool length then execute the automatic tool length offset cycle.
offset for other tools Repeat this operation for all tools that require tool
length offset data setting.
Setting the tool change

position data This step is not necessary for MC-H.
Usually, the tool breakage detection cycle is exe-

Executing automatic tool cuted after each cutting operation with the relevant
breakage detection cycle tool is completed.
Tool length offset data must be set for tools that are
checked for breakage.
The function determines whether the machining is

continued as programmed or error processing is exe-
Checking for breakage
Tool not cuted according to the result of the automatic tool
broken breakage detection cycle.
Tool broken
This step is not necessary if the setting that specifies
the machine should stop in the alarm stop state when
tool breakage is detected is made.
When the setting that specifies automatic selection of

Pallet change, etc. a spare tool if tool breakage is detected is made, the
error processing on occurrence of tool breakage
should be as follows: the CNC judges that the work-
piece machined using the broken tool is defective,
changes the pallet to a new one and starts machining
for a new workpiece.
ME61315R0300300090001
[Supplement]
With a double-column machining center that has a touch sensor at a location other than the
crossrail (on the table, for example), the Z-axis zero point must be set after positioning the
crossrail.
6130-E P-10
1-2-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point
Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Z-axis)
Set the Z-axis direction offset value of the touch sensor zero point using a reference tool so that the
automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function operates correctly.
[Supplement]
If Y-axis has to be retracted to set the touch sensor zero point, set the Y-axis retraction position
first by referring to [1-4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)].
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, press the CYCLE START button.
Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [1-2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. In this
setting, either the automatic tool length offset mode or the automatic tool breakage detection
cycle may be selected.
The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the
GAUGING RESULTS screen.
ME61315R0300300100001
For the procedure for opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window, refer to [VARIOUS ON/
OFF Function Key] in 1-1-2.
2 Execute the sensor advance command M144 in the MDI mode. (In the case of a movable type
sensor)
3 Set the reference tool in the spindle, and manually bring the nose of the reference tool near the
Z-axis touch sensor.
There will inevitably be some slight displacement between the center of the sensor and the
center of the reference tool. This displacement, however, does not pose a problem for the
succeeding operation.
6130-E P-11
[Supplement]
The “reference tool” means the tool used for setting the zero point in a work coordinate
system.
4 At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.
CALL OO30 PAXI=7 PLI=** (VFST=**)
M02
[Supplement]
The settings for PLI should be as indicated below
Offset Type PLl Setting

Relative offset type 0
Absolute offset type Length from the spindle nose
face
Usually, the tool used for zero setting of the work coordinate system is also used for the sensor
zero point setting cycle. Therefore, there is no tool length difference between the tools used for
the two different zero point setting cycles, and the setting for PLI should be “zero” (PLI = 0).
For the absolute offset type, set the accurate length of the tool currently set in the spindle as
illustrated to the left.
If no value is set for PLI, either “PLI = 150 mm (5.91 in.)” or “PLI = 200 mm (7.87 in.)” is
assumed. Which of the values is used is determined by the machine model.
Tool used for zero setting of

the work coordinate system
Relative offset type

PLI = 0
Absolute offset type
PLI
ME61315R0300300100002
[Supplement]
VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.
As the program above is executed, the reference tool automatically comes into contact with
the Z-axis touch sensor, whereupon Z-axis zero offset is executed.
Zero offset of both the X and Y axes is executed so that the present (actual) position of the
reference tool becomes X = 0, Y = 0.
How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in
[Reference Tool Movements during Z-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting] on 1-2-1.
6130-E P-12
sensor)
6 Mount a small-diameter drill in the spindle.
7 Bring the drill tip manually near to the touch sensor and align the spindle center (drill center)
with the center of the touch sensor.
CALL OO30 PAXI=3
M02
X- and Y-axis zero offset is executed so that the present (actual) position of the drill becomes X
= 0, Y = 0. (The Z-axis does not move.)
After the execution of the X- and Y-axis zero offset, the Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the
travel end in the positive (+) direction and the sensor retracts, completing touch sensor zero
point setting.
The result is fed back to the offset data of system work coordinate system No. 1.
The set offset data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The offset data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is
displayed at the X, Y, and Z columns of the NO. 1 line
ME61315R0300300100003
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 1 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length
offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or
referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window, refer to
[MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key] in 1-1-2.
This completes the Z-axis touch sensor zero point setting.

6130-E P-13
Reference Tool Movements during Z-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting
During the execution of the Z-axis touch sensor zero point setting, the reference tool moves as
indicated below.
Machine operation
(1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.
(2) The spindle is oriented.
(3) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back once and then moves forward.
(4) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate in the negative (-) direction until the reference tool
comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(5) The Z-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(7) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back.
Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Y-axis)
When the specifications for automatic tool length offset and automatic breakage detection in the Y-
axis direction (diameter direction) are selected, set the Y-axis touch sensor zero point retraction
position first by referring to [1-2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function].
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**”, and press the CYCLE START button.
Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [1-2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. In this
setting, either the automatic tool length offset mode or the automatic tool breakage detection
cycle may be selected.
If an appropriate value is already set for VFST, it is not necessary to set the value here.
GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up
window, refer to [VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key] in 1-1-2.
sensor)
3 Set the reference tool in the spindle, and manually bring the nose of the reference tool near the
Y-axis touch sensor.
Align the center of the reference tool with the center of the Y-axis touch sensor.
CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0(or accurate length of reference tool)

PY=Accurate radius of reference tool (VFST=**)
M02
ME61315R0300300120001
In actual programming, the three lines of program above are expressed in one line as indicated
below.
6130-E P-14
[Example]
CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0 PY=10 (VFST=1)
φ or accurate length of reference tool Accurate radius of reference tool

ME61315R0300300120002
[Supplement]
1) When setting PLI, pay attention to the same point as explained in [Setting the Touch Sensor
Zero Point (Z-axis)] on 1-2-1.
2) Always set PY. If it is not set, “PY = 0” is assumed.
3) VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.
As the program above is executed, the reference tool automatically comes into contact with
the Y-axis touch sensor, whereupon Y-axis zero offset is executed. Zero offset of both the Z-
and X-axes is executed at the same time.
How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [Reference
Tool Movements during Y-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting] on 1-2-1.
The result is fed back to the offset data of system work coordinate system No. 4.
The set offset data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The offset data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is
displayed at the X, Y, and Z columns, respectively.
4) Since system work coordinate system No. 4 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length
offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set nor
referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window, refer to [MSB
ZERO ON/OFF Function Key] in 1-1-2.
This completes the Y-axis touch sensor zero point setting.
6130-E P-15
Reference Tool Movements during Y-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting
During the execution of the Y-axis touch sensor zero point setting, the reference tool moves as
indicated below.
Machine operation
(3) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back once and then moves forward.
(4) The Z-axis moves to the Y-axis touch sensor position (the position where the Z-axis was first
moved manually).
(5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the reference tool comes into contact with the
touch sensor.
(6) The Y-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(7) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the approach start position.
6130-E P-16
1-2-2. Setting the Pot No./Tool No. Table

Set the Pot No./Tool No. table in the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet on the TOOL DATA screen.
The table setting shown below uses a machine with 10-tool capacity magazine as an example.
Assign a tool number

to each tool.
Magazine capacity: 10 tools
Pot No./Tool No. Correspondence Table

Pot Number Tool Number When changing a tool in the pot at
setup, write the tool data in the Pot
1 1
No./Tool No. table in the MAGAZINE
2 2 INFO. sheet on the TOOL DATA screen.
The memory of the OSP can hold the life
3 3
expectancy data of up to 999 tools.
4 20
5 30
6 31
7 32
8 105
9 270
10 271
ME61315R0300300140001
The tool offset data obtained by the execution of an automatic tool length offset cycle is set for the
same offset number as the tool number of the tool presently being used (active tool).Similarly, the
tool offset number referred to and compared when the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is
executed is the same offset number as the tool number of the active tool.
[Supplement]
To automatically change a tool for a spare tool, tools must be registered in a tool group.
For the procedure for registering tools in a group, refer to the Tool Management Function section
of the special specifications of the Operation Manual.
6130-E P-17
1-2-3. Operation Mode Designation

The basic operation mode of automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection is
designated by the system variable VFST.
Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated
once: it does not have to be set each time the MSB of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle is called.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.
VFST Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

ME61315R0300300150001
Bit No Setting Description

0 Automatic tool breakage detection cycle
Bit 0
1 Automatic tool length offset cycle
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
Bit 1 1
detection cycle in the Y-axis direction.
detection cycle in the Y-axis direction after the execution of the automatic
tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis
Bit 2 1
direction.
To execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection cycle only in the Z-axis direction, set “0” for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.
Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch
sensor position.
Bit 3 1
Set “1” for Bit 3 with machine models such as MCV in which the touch
sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.
Bit 4 0 Always set “0”.
Designates the relative offset type.
0 The tool length in reference to the reference tool used for zero point
setting of a work coordinate system is used as the tool length offset data.
Bit 7
Designates the absolute offset type.
1 The length of the tool from the spindle nose surface is regarded as the
tool length offset data.
6130-E P-18
An example of VFST settings is given in the following table.
Relative/
X-axis Automatic Tool Length
Absolute Z-axis/Y-axis VFST
Model Movement Offset/Automatic Tool
Offset Offset Value
Yes/No Breakage Detection
Type
Automatic tool length offset #01H
Relative
Yes Only Z-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
offset #00H
MC-H detection
MC-V Automatic tool length offset #81H
Absolute
Yes Only Z-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
offset #80H
detection
Only Z-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
#08H
detection
Automatic tool length offset #0BH
Relative
No Only Y-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
offset #0AH
detection
Automatic tool length offset #0DH
MCV Y-axis offset after Z-
axis offset Automatic tool breakage
MCR #0CH
detection
MCM
(Vertical Automatic tool length offset #89H
spindle) Only Z-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
#88H
detection
Absolute
No Only Y-axis offset Automatic tool breakage
offset #8AH
detection
Automatic tool length offset #8DH
Y-axis offset after Z-
axis offset Automatic tool breakage
#8CH
detection
[Supplement]
Refer to [1-3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for
Horizontal Tools of MCM] for details of automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection for the horizontal tools of MCM horizontal.
6130-E P-19
1-2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function

The automatic tool length offset function automatically corrects the tool length according to the offset
data set using the reference tool.
Z-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
Automatic tool length offset in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below.
[Supplement]
Make sure that the zero point of the Z-axis touch sensor has been set before executing Z-axis
automatic tool length offset. Never execute Z-axis automatic tool length offset when the Z-axis
touch sensor zero point has not been set.
Procedure :
Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [1-2-3. Operation Mode Designation].
GAUGING RESULTS screen. Refer to [VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key] in 1-1-2.
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the spindle.
When the tool is mounted in the spindle manually, make sure that the active tool number
shown on the ATC operation screen agrees with the tool number of the tool mounted in the
spindle.
This operation is not necessary when the tool is mounted in the spindle by executing the M06
command, either in automatic or MDI operation.
3 Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.

CALL OO30 (VFST=**) (PLI = Anticipated tool length)
M02
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the Z-axis
touch sensor and the tool length offset data is calculated and stored in the CNC memory.
The set tool length offset data can be checked by displaying the TOOL OFFSET/
COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen.
The obtained results are also displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen
6130-E P-20
ME61315R0300300170001
This ends the Z-axis automatic tool length offset processing.
[Supplement]
2) Set the anticipated tool length for PLI.
If no value is set for PLI, the value set for CNC optional parameter (long word) No. 43
(distance from the spindle gauge line) is automatically set as the anticipated tool length.
Machine operation
During the execution of the Z-axis automatic tool length offset, the tool moves as indicated below.
(3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch
sensor.
For tools whose nose is not at the center of the spindle, refer to items (6) PX and (7) PY in [1-6-
3. How to Use Variables].
(4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the touch
sensor.
(6) The Z-axis moves back several millimeters at a rapid feedrate.
(7) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the touch
sensor again.
6130-E P-21
The result of gauging is stored under the same tool length offset number as the tool number of
the active tool.
Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
Automatic tool length offset in the Y-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below.
[Supplement]
1) Make sure that the zero point of the Z-axis and Y-axis touch sensors has been set before
executing Y-axis automatic tool length offset. Never execute Y-axis automatic tool length offset
when the touch sensor zero point has not been set.
2) Before executing automatic tool length offset in the Y-axis direction, set the Z-axis tool length
offset data of the tools.
The Z-axis tool length offset data can be set either by executing the Z-axis automatic tool
length offset or by entering an appropriate value in the Pot No./Tool No. table in the
MAGAZINE INFO. sheet on the TOOL DATA screen.
Procedure :
GAUGING RESULTS screen. Refer to [VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key] in 1-1-2.
2 Mount the tool for which Y-axis automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the spindle.
spindle.
command either in automatic or MDI operation.

CALL OO30 PY= Anticipated cutter radius(VFST=**)
M02
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the Y-axis
touch sensor and the cutter radius compensation data is calculated and stored in the CNC
memory.
The set cutter radius compensation data can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH
OFFSET/CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen. The
obtained results are also displayed at the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
This ends the Y-axis automatic tool length offset processing.
[Supplement]
6130-E P-22
Machine operation
During the execution of the Y-axis automatic tool length offset, the tool moves as indicated below.
(3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Z-axis
touch sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Y-axis
touch sensor.
(5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the Y-axis
touch sensor.
(6) The Y-axis comes to a stop when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
The result of gauging is stored under the same cutter radius compensation number as the tool
number of the active tool.
(7) The Y-axis returns at a rapid feedrate.
Continuous Z-axis and Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
To execute automatic tool length offset on the Z-axis and the Y-axis continuously, follow the
For points of caution and details of the tool length offset, refer to [Z-axis Automatic Tool Length
Offset] and [Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset] in 1-2-4.
Procedure :

CALL OO30 PY= Anticipated cutter radius (PLI = Anticipated tool length) (VFST=**)
M02
The tool is first brought into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor then the Y-axis touch sensor.
This ends the continuous Z-axis and Y-axis automatic tool length offset processing.
6130-E P-23
1-2-5. Setting the Tool Change Position (Other Than MC-H)

When a tool is found to be broken in the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the broken tool
can be automatically returned to the magazine by using a subprogram.
In order to execute this automatic tool return cycle, the tool change position must be set for MC-V
and double-column machining centers since these types of machining centers do not have a preset
ATC home position like MC-H.
If the tool change position is not set for these types of machining centers, the tool change will be
carried out just above the touch sensor. Since this may cause problems with some kinds of
workpieces, it is necessary to set the tool change position for MC-V and double-column machining
centers.
Procedure :
1 Move the spindle to the desired tool change position.

Note that X- and Y-axis must be positioned at the desired tool change position. Positioning of
the Z-axis is not necessary.
CALL OO31
M02
The axes will not move at all even when a program is executed.
X-axis and Y-axis positions during the program execution are stored as the tool change
positions at the system work coordinate system No.2.
The set tool change position data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET
(VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The tool change position data
of the X-, and Y-axis is displayed at the X and Y columns of the NO. 2 line.
This completes the tool change position setting.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 2 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length
offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced.
6130-E P-24
1-2-6. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Z-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Automatic tool breakage detection in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below.
[Supplement]
Before executing Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the
touch sensor and the tool change position have been set (Not necessary for MC-H).
Procedure :
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection is to be executed in the spindle.
spindle.

CALL OO30 PLE1 = Tool breakage judgment value (VFST=**) (PGO=**)
M02
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the touch
sensor and the tool length is obtained.
The obtained tool length is compared to the tool length offset data stored in the CNC memory
and a tool breakage alarm occurs if the difference is greater than the value set for PLE1.
The tool breakage alarm also occurs if the tool nose fails to contact the touch sensor during the
execution of the program.
This ends the Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection processing.
[Supplement]
2) To replace a broken tool with a spare tool, PGO must be designated.
For details of PGO, refer to item (11) PGO(P GO) in [1-6-3. How to Use Variables].
6130-E P-25
Machine operation
During the execution of the Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, the tool moves as indicated
below.
sensor.
For tools whose nose is not at the center of the spindle, refer to items (6) PX and (7) PY in [1-6-
3. How to Use Variables].
(4) The tool edge moves at the rapid traverse to a position in front of the touch sensor with a
clearance of the safety distance (PUDT). (*1)
If PUDT is not specified, the axis moves at the rapid traverse to a position in front of the touch
sensor with a clearance of 5 mm (0.20 in.).
(5) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate to the position 10 mm (0.39 in.) past the point where
the tool nose would be in contact with the touch sensor.
 If the tool has not been broken or the amount of chipping is smaller than 10 mm (0.39 in.):
The tool nose comes into contact with the touch sensor and the Z-axis stops. The tool
length is calculated from the coordinate value of the contact position and is stored in the
CNC memory temporarily.
 If the tool has been broken (amount of chipping is greater than 10 mm (0.39 in.)):
The tool nose will not contact the touch sensor.
(*1) If the NC optional parameter bit No.74 bit 4 is check marked, the setting is changed from
“moves at the rapid traverse” to “moves at the rapid approach rate”.
6130-E P-26
Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Automatic tool breakage detection in the Y-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated below.
[Supplement]
Before executing Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the
touch sensor has been set.
Procedure :
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection is to be executed in the spindle.
spindle.

CALL OO30 PLEY=Tool breakage judgment value PY=Anticipated cutter radius (VFST=**)
M02
sensor and the cutter radius is obtained.
The obtained cutter radius is compared to the cutter radius compensation data stored in the
CNC memory and a tool breakage alarm occurs if the difference is greater than the value set
for PLEY.
The tool breakage alarm also occurs if the tool fails to contact the touch sensor during the
execution of the program.
This ends the Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection processing.
[Supplement]
6130-E P-27
Machine operation
During the execution of the Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection, the tool moves as indicated
below.
sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Y-axis touch
sensor.
(5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate to the position 10 mm (0.39 in.) past the point where
the tool nose would be in contact with the touch sensor.
 If the tool has not been broken or amount of chipping is smaller than 10 mm (0.39 in.):
The tool nose comes into contact with the touch sensor and the Y-axis stops. The cutter
radius is calculated from the coordinate value of the contact position and is stored in the
CNC memory temporarily.
 If the tool has been broken (amount of chipping is greater than 10 mm (0.39 in.)):
The tool nose will not contact the touch sensor.
(6) The Y-axis returns at a rapid feedrate.
Continuous Z-axis and Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
To execute automatic tool breakage detection on the Z-axis and the Y-axis continuously, follow the
For items carefully attended to and details of the tool length offset, refer to [Z-axis Automatic Tool
Breakage Detection] and [Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection] in 1-2-6.
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MDI mode, input “VFST=**” and press the CYCLE START button.
CALL OO30 (VFST=**) PY=Anticipated cutter radius

PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (Z-axis)
PLEY=Tool breakage judgment value (Y-axis)
M02
ME61315R0300300230001
3 The tool is first brought into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor to check tool breakage in the
Z-axis direction. When tool breakage is not detected in the Z-axis direction, tool breakage in
the Y-axis direction is checked.
6130-E P-28
Judgment of Tool Breakage
When a spare tool is selected in response to the detection of tool breakage, operation does not stop
even when the breakage is detected. Therefore, it is necessary to judge the occurrence of tool
breakage at the end of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle and branch the program
execution in accordance with the result of the judgment.
 It can be judged whether or not the tool is broken by reading system variable VOK1.
VOK1 = 0 Tool is not broken.
VOK1 ≠ 0 Tool is broken.
VOK1 indicates the result of the previously executed automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
 Another system variable VOK2 is also available for judgment.

VOK2 indicates the result of automatic tool breakage detection cycles executed after clearance
to 0 (VOK2 = 0). If tool breakage is detected even once, the value set for VOK2 is “VOK2 ≠ 0”.
 VOK1 and VOK2 are not cleared to 0 when the CNC is reset.
[Supplement]
When tool breakage is detected by the automatic tool breakage detection function, the tool
number is registered by the tool management function as that of a broken tool.
In order to use the same tool number after taking the necessary measures, such as replacement
with a new tool, the registration of the broken tool number must be cleared.
Refer to Tool Management Function in special specifications of the Operation Manual for the
procedure for resetting broken tool registration.
6130-E P-29
1-2-7. Cycle Time Reduction for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic

Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
By feeding a tool close to the sensor at a rapid feedrate, it is possible to reduce the cycle time of the
automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
Spindle nose face
Tool
G0 (4) Max.
tool Anticipated tool
length length
G31F=PF1 (5) VLTL PL1
G31F2000 (6) Safety distance PUDT
Sensor
ME61315R0300300250001
Fig.1-1 Cycle Time Reduction Function
To use this function, it is necessary to set the following parameters.
 Optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 3:

Default of maximum tool length for automatic tool length offset/tool breakage detection
With check mark: Valid
Without check mark: Invalid (Initial value)
 Optional parameter (long word) No. 44: Max. tool length

For this parameter, set the maximum tool length among the tools that will be used.
Setting range: 0 to 999
Unit: mm
Initial setting: 0
[Supplement]
Set an appropriate value for the maximum tool length setting parameter since “0” is set as the
initial value.
6130-E P-30
Automatic tool length offset cycle
Machine operation
sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the point distanced from the touch sensor by “safety
distance (PUDT) + max. tool length (VLTL)”.
This operation is or is not executed according to the setting for the parameter.
(5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF1, to the point distanced from the touch
sensor by “anticipated tool length (PLI) + safety distance (PUDT)”.
If the PLI command is not specified, the Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate specified by PF1 to the
point distanced from the touch sensor by “safety distance (PUDT)”. If the PF1 command is not
specified, the Z-axis moves at F2000.
(6) The Z-axis moves at F2000 to the point 10 mm (0.39 in.) beyond the anticipated contact point.
It stops when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(7) The Z-axis returns 5 mm (0.20 in.) from the contact point.
(8) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the point 10 mm (0.39 in.) beyond the
contact point.
(9) The tool length offset data is written to the active tool number or the offset number specified by
the PH command.
Automatic tool breakage detection cycle
Machine operation
(1) The same operation as steps 1) to 4) of the automatic tool length offset cycle explained above is
executed.
(2) The Z-axis moves at rapid feedrate to the point 5 mm (0.20 in.) away the anticipated contact
point. (*1)
(3) The Z-axis moves at skip feedrate F1000 to the point 10 mm (0.39 in.) beyond the anticipated
contact point.
(*1) If the NC optional parameter bit No.74 bit 4 is check marked, the setting is changed from
“moves at the rapid traverse” to “moves at the rapid approach rate”.
6130-E P-31
1-2-8. New Cycle Time Reduction Function for Automatic Tool Length
Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
By reducing the execution time of the cycle steps that can be reduced in the previous automatic tool
length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle (Hereafter, conventional cycle time reduction
function), the cycle time reduction function is made more powerful (Hereafter, new cycle time
reduction function).
This new cycle time reduction function is usable only in the vertical tool direction.
Command Format and Variables of the New Cycle Time Reduction Function
The command format and the variables used by the new cycle time reduction function are described
below.
 Command format
The following is an example command to use the new cycle time reduction function.
CALL OO30 PZRC=1 PSFT=10 POVT=20 PF1=5000 PF2=2000 M02
 Variables
PZRC Used to select the new or conventional cycle time reduction function.
“1” selects the new cycle time reduction function and “0” selects the conventional
cycle time reduction function. The default is “0”.
PUDT: Undertravel distance (safety distance)
This defines the point where, during the approach of a cutting tool to the touch
sensor, the approach speed is changed from high-speed to low-speed. The
distance from the touch sensor to the tool nose is designated.
For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is 5 mm (0.20 in.).
POVT: Overtravel distance (sensor breakage prevention distance)
Default is 10 mm (0.39 in.).
PFA: Approach speed to undertravel point
For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is F4000.
PF2: Approach speed to overtravel point
For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is F1000.
VMSBU: Setting for CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 36
If the setting for bit 3 of this parameter is “1”, with “0” set for PZRC, the
conventional cycle time reduction function is selected.
VLTL: Maximum tool length
The value set for CNC optional parameter (long word) No. 44
PSFT: Feedrate shift distance
This defines the point where, during approach of a cutting tool to the touch
sensor, the approach speed is changed from a rapid feedrate to high-speed (low-
speed if PSFT is not specified). The distance from the touch sensor to the tool
nose is designated.
The default is 5 mm (0.20 in.).
6130-E P-32
Tool Movements of New Cycle Time Reduction Function
During the execution of the new cycle time reduction function, the tool moves as indicated below.
Note that tool movements differ according to the setting of the variables.
Variable setting: PZRC = 0, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 0
Machine operation
(1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction
(3) The Y-axis and the X-axis, in this order, move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the
center of the touch sensor.
(4) The tool nose moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PFA, to the position PUDT above the touch
sensor zero point.
The tool nose stops when the tool comes into contact with the sensor.
(5) The tool nose moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the position POVT below the touch
sensor zero point.
2)
Rapid feed 3)
Rapid feed 1)
Rapid feed 6)
PFA 4)
Touch sensor PF2 5) PUDT

zero point POVT
ME61315R0300300300001
Variable setting: PZRC = 0, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 1

6130-E P-33
Machine operation
(4) The spindle nose face moves down at a rapid feedrate until the spindle nose face reaches the
point VLTL above the touch sensor zero point.
(5) The tool nose moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PFA, to the position PUDT above the touch
sensor zero point.
(6) The tool nose moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the position POVT below the touch
sensor zero point.
2)
Rapid feed 3)
Rapid feed 1)
Rapid feed 4)
Rapid feed 7)
PFA 5)
VLTL
PF2 6) PUDT
POVT
ME61315R0300300300002
Variable setting: PZRC = 1, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 0 or 1

If “PUDT > PSFT”, an alarm (Alarm B 2305 UNTENDED: gauging impossible 64) occurs.
6130-E P-34
Machine operation
(1) If the tool nose is below the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”, the tool nose moves up at
a rapid feedrate to the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”
(4) The tool nose moves down at a rapid feedrate to the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”.
(5) The tool nose moves down at a skip feedrate PFA to the point “touch sensor zero point +
PUDT”.
(6) The tool nose moves down at a skip feedrate PF2 to the point “touch sensor zero point -
POVT”.
(7) The tool nose moves up at rapid feedrate to the point “touch sensor zero point + PSFT”.
2)
Rapid feed 3)
Rapid feed 4)
Rapid feed 1)
Rapid feed 7)
2)
PFA 5) PSFT
PUDT
POVT
PF2 6)
ME61315R0300300300003
6130-E P-35
1-3. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Detection Function for Special Tools and Attachments
This section deals with the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function
for special tools and attachments. If no such tools or attachments are used, this section may be
skipped.
1-3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM
The operation procedure for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection
function for horizontal tools of MCM is described below.
[Supplement]
Since the machine operations for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection function used for horizontal tools of MCM are similar to those for vertical tools of MCM,
part of the explanation is omitted.
For the information not given below, refer to [1-2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool
Breakage Detection Operation].
Machine operation
During the execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for
the horizontal tool of MCM, the tool moves as indicated below.
(2) M76 and M19 are executed.

The swivel head is indexed to the right position and the spindle is oriented.
(3) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to a position just before the touch sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the touch sensor position for the horizontal tool.
(5) From here on, the movements are the same as for a vertical tool.
Note, however, that with an MCM horizontal tool, the Z-axis movements of a vertical tool are
replaced by the Y-axis movements of a horizontal tool.
3)
2)
1) 4)
5)
ME61315R0300300320001
6130-E P-36
Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position
When executing the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for an
MCM horizontal tool, the spindle may strike the workpiece during Z-axis downward operation.
To avoid such a problem, it is necessary to set the Z-axis lower limit position as close to the touch
sensor as possible, but at a position where the spindle or other machine unit will not collide with the
touch sensor unit.
Set the Z-axis lower limit position in the manner indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the position where the Z-axis lower limit position is to be set.
In this operation, the X- and Z-axis may be at any position.
CALL OO32
M02
When this program is executed, axes do not move.
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Z-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 9 as the Z-axis lower limit position.
The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The Z-axis lower limit coordinate value is
displayed at the Y column of the NO. 9 line.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 9 is used exclusively for automatic tool length offset
and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced.
6130-E P-37
Designating the Operation Mode
As with a vertical tool, the basic operation mode for a horizontal tool is set using system variable
VFST.
The setting for system variable VFST is the same as that for a vertical spindle with the exception
that “1” is set for bit 6.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance

ME61315R0300300340001
Bit No. Setting Description

Bit 0
Bit 1 1
detection cycle in the Z-axis (radial) direction
detection cycle in the Z-axis (radial) direction after the execution of the
automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in
Bit 2 1 the Y-axis (tool length) direction.
To execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection cycle only in the Y-axis (tool length) direction, set “0” for both
Bit 1 and Bit 2
Does not move the X-axis when positioning a tool to the touch sensor
Bit 3 1
position.
Bit 4 0 Always set “0”
0
detection cycle for a vertical tool.
Bit 6
1
detection cycle for a horizontal tool.
0 Designates the relative offset type.
Bit 7
1 Designates the absolute offset type.
6130-E P-38
An example of VFST settings is given in the following table.
Relative/
X-axis Offset in Tool Length Automatic Tool Length
Absolute VFST
Model Movement Direction/Tool Radial Offset/Automatic Tool
Offset Value
Yes/No Direction Breakage Detection
Type
Offset only in the tool
length direction Automatic tool breakage
#48H
detection
Relative Offset only in the tool
No Automatic tool breakage
offset radial direction #4AH
detection
Offset in the tool Automatic tool length offset #4DH
length direction then Automatic tool breakage
MCM the tool radial direction #4CH
detection
Horizonta
l tool Automatic tool length offset #C9H
Offset only in the tool
length direction Automatic tool breakage
#C8H
detection
Automatic tool length offset #CBH
Absolute Offset only in the tool
No Automatic tool breakage
offset radial direction #CAH
detection
Offset in the tool Automatic tool length offset #CDH
length direction then Automatic tool breakage
the tool radial direction #CCH
detection
6130-E P-39
Setting the Zero Point of Horizontal Tool Touch Sensor
Set the zero point of the touch sensor for MCM horizontal tools in the manner indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Select the MDI mode and execute M144 to move the reference tool near the horizontal tool
touch sensor.
Since the procedure up to this step is the same as used for a vertical tool, refer to [1-2-1.
Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] for details.
 Setting the zero point for the tool length (Y-axis) direction touch sensor
CALL OO30 PAXI=#27H PLI=0 (or accurate reference tool length) (VFST=**)
M02
 Setting the zero point for the tool radius (Z-axis) direction touch sensor
CALL OO30 PAXI=#47H PLI=0 (or accurate reference tool length) (VFST=**)
PZ=Accurate radius of the reference tool
M02
ME61315R0300300350001
The result of gauging is stored in the system work coordinate system No. 7 (zero point of
the tool length direction (Y-axis direction) touch sensor) and the system work coordinate
system No. 8 (zero point of the tool radius direction (Z-axis direction) touch sensor).
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
[Supplement]
Before setting the zero point, index the swivel head to the following position.
Vertical tool: Front position (M73)
Horizontal tool: Right position (M76)
6130-E P-40
Automatic Tool Length Offset for Horizontal Tools
Automatic tool length offset for MCM horizontal tools is executed in the manner indicated below.
[Supplement]
Before executing automatic tool length offset for horizontal tools, make sure that the zero point of
the horizontal tool touch sensor has been set
Procedure :
Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [Designating the Operation Mode] in 1-3-1.
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset should be executed in the spindle.
 In the tool length (Y-axis) direction

CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) (PLI=Anticipated tool length)
M02
 In the tool radius (Z-axis) direction

CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) PZ=Anticipated tool radius
M02
 Both in the tool length (Y-axis) direction and the tool radius (Z-axis) direction
CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) PZ=Anticipated tool radius (PLI=Anticipated tool
length)
M02
sensor and the cutter radius compensation data is calculated and stored in the CNC memory.
The result of gauging can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/CUTTER
RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen. The obtained results are also
displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
6130-E P-41
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle for Horizontal Tools
Automatic tool breakage detection for MCM horizontal tools is executed in the manner indicated
below.
[Supplement]
Before executing automatic tool breakage detection for horizontal tools, make sure that the zero
point of the horizontal tool touch sensor has been set.
Procedure :
Set an appropriate value for “**” by referring to [Designating the Operation Mode] in 1-3-1.
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection should be executed in the spindle.
 In the tool length (Y-axis) direction

CALL OO30 PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (VFST=Appropriate value)
M02
 In the tool radius (Z-axis) direction

CALL OO30 PLEZ=Tool breakage judgment value PZ=Anticipated tool radius
(VFST=Appropriate value)
M02
 Both in the tool length (Y-axis) direction and the tool radius (Z-axis) direction
CALL OO30 PZ=Anticipated tool radius

PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (tool length direction)
PLEZ=Tool breakage judgment value (tool radius direction)
(VFST=Appropriate value)
M02
ME61315R0300300370001
sensor, and the tool length is calculated.
The function compares the obtained tool length to the tool length offset data stored in the
CNC memory and judges the tool has been broken if the difference is greater than the set
tool breakage judgment value.
The result of gauging is displayed at the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
[Supplement]
Before executing tool length offset/tool breakage detection for horizontal tools, index the swivel
head to the following position.
Vertical tool: Front position (M73)
Horizontal tool: Right position (M76)
All other supplements are the same as in the case of vertical tools.
6130-E P-42
1-3-2. Operation for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool

Breakage Detection on B/C-axis Attachments, 90° Angular
Attachments and Extension Attachments (Option)
This subsection describes the functions of automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection for tools mounted in a B/C-axis attachment, 90° angular attachment, or extension
attachment.
(PAC = 90°)
(PAC = 180°)
(PAC = 0°)
Z+ (PAC = 270°)
Y+
X+
ME61315R0300300380001
Fig.1-2 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of 90° Angular Attachment
PAC = 90°
PAC = 180°
PAC = 0°
PAC = 270°
PAB
Z+
Y+
X+
ME61315R0300300380002
Fig.1-3 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of B/C-axis Attachment

6130-E P-43
[Supplement]
1) PAB index angle should be PAB=0° or PAB=90°.

2) Call the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen and set the data
displayed there on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen.
The correspondence between the items displayed on the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL
COMPENSATION screen and those on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION
screen is indicated below.
ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) ATTACHMENT SWIVEL

SWIVEL COMPENSATION COMPENSATION screen
screen
Data for PAC = 0 PAB = 0 H* in the LOWER (G185) screen
Data for PAC = 0 PAB = 90 H* in the FRONT (G181) screen
Data for PAC = 90 PAB = 90 H* in the LEFT (G182) screen
Data for PAC = 180 PAB = 90 H* in the REAR (G183) screen
Data for PAC = 270 PAB = 90 H* in the RIGHT (G184) screen
ME61315R0300300380003
H*: Attachment compensation numbers H1 to H8

If two B/C-axis attachments are used, set their data with separate compensation numbers.
6130-E P-44
Designating the Operation Mode
Use system variable “VFST” to designate the basic operation modes for automatic tool length offset
or automatic tool breakage detection.
Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated
once: it does not have to be set each time the MSB of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle is called.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance

ME61315R0300300390001

Bit 0
Bit 1 1
detection cycle in the tool radius direction.
detection cycle in the tool radius direction after the execution of the
automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in
Bit 2 1 the tool length direction.
To execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection cycle only in the tool length direction, set “0” for both Bit 1 and
Bit 2.
sensor position.
Bit 3 1
Set “1” for Bit 3 for machine models such as MC-V in which the touch
sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.
Bit 4 0 Always set “0”
0 detection cycle for a vertical tool or a tool in the extension attachment or
the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 0°).
Bit 6
1 detection cycle for a tool in the 90° attachment or the B/C-axis
attachment (PAB = 90°).
Bit 7
6130-E P-45
Command Format
The command format used for calling the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection cycle for B/C-axis attachment, 90° attachment and extension attachment is indicated
below.
CALL(OO30 PAXI=*........) PAT=*
Conventional transfer variable

ME61315R0300300400001
PAT: Attachment swivel compensation number (Setting range: 1 to 7)
[Supplement]
1) The installation angle of the 90° angular attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°)
must be set to 270°.
2) The same sensor zero point is used for a vertical tool/extension attachment/B/C-axis
attachment (PAB = 0°) and a 90° attachment/B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°). Set the sensor
zero point so that gauging cycles can be executed without causing trouble for any attachment.
Designating the Attachment
The type of attachment to be used is designated by the setting for VFST, PAXI and PAT as indicated
below.
PAXI PAT
Bit 6 of VFST
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Command
Vertical spindle 0 0 0 0/1 None
Extension attachment
B/C-axis attachment 0 0 0 0/1 1 to 7
(PAB = 0°)
90° attachment
B/C-axis attachment 1 0/1 0/1 0 1 to 7
(PAB = 90°)
Movements of Tool in 90° Attachment/B/C-axis Attachment (PAB = 90°)
When a tool is mounted in the 90° attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°), the cycle is
executed in the same manner as for a tool mounted in the horizontal spindle of MCM.
In this case, however, the Z-axis lower limit position is determined taking into account the
attachment swivel compensation amount.
For details and supplemental information on the tool movements of a tool mounted in the 90°
attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90°), refer to [1-3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM].
Setting the Tool Change Position
If breakage of a tool is detected (PGO = 2) after the execution of a tool breakage detection cycle, the
axes move to the tool change position.
6130-E P-46
The tool change position must be determined so that positioning at the tool change position will not
cause interference between the tool and a workpiece with any type of attachment (vertical tool, 90°
attachment, extension attachment, B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 0°, 90°)).
[Supplement]
If the machine is equipped with the B/C-axis attachment (PAB =90°), set “PGO=12” to do axis
movements to the tool change position on detection of tool breakage. For details regarding PGO,
refer to the item (11) PGO (P GO) in 1-6-3. “How to Use Variables.”
Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position
To set the Z-axis lower limit position, add transfer variable PAT to the usual setting program.
CALL OO32 PAT=*
PAT:Attachment swivel compensation number (Setting range: 1 to 7)
Setting the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data
To use the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function, the attachment
swivel compensation data must be correctly set.
Set the compensation data for the 90° attachment on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL
COMPENSATION screen (G181 to G184) and the data for the extension attachment on the
ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen (G185).
Measuring the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data
Measure the attachment swivel compensation data for each type of attachment and each
attachment position by repeating the procedure indicated below and set the obtained data for the
corresponding item (G181 to G185) on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen.
Procedure :
1 Mount the reference tool to the spindle where no attachment is mounted and fix a micro-
indicator at the center of the table.
2 Manually move the X-, Y- and Z-axis to the position where the micro-indicator reads “0”.
3 Select a desired zero point and set the zero offset data.
Set “0” for the actual position data and take this position as the reference for the following
operation.
4 Change the spindle tool to an attachment (90° attachment or extension attachment) and mount
the reference to the attachment.
5 Carry out positioning so that the micro-indicator reads “0” and set the coordinate values at that
position.
 90° attachment
Index the attachment to four positions, 0° (front), 90° (left), 180° (rear) and 270° (right),
and carry out positioning at the individual attachment index positions.
 Extension attachment
Since the extension attachment is installed at a fixed angle, carry out positioning at the
preset angle.
6130-E P-47
6 Set the compensation data by displaying the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION

screen.
 Extension attachment
Set the coordinate values obtained in the operation in step 5) above on the ATTACHMENT
SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen (G185).
 90° attachment
Calculate the compensation data for each index angle (PAC = 0, 90, 180, 270) based on
the coordinate values obtained in step 5) and set the calculated compensation data for the
corresponding setting item on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
(G181 to G184).
To calculate the compensation data at each attachment index angle, refer to [Calculating
the Compensation Data for a 90° Attachment] in 1-3-2.
The correspondence between the PAC angle and setting items is indicated below.
PAC = 0: G181 (front) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
PAC = 90: G182 (left) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
PAC = 180: G183 (rear) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
PAC = 270: G184 (right) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
Reference
tool
X
Y
Z
ME61315R0300300460001
6130-E P-48
An example of attachment compensation numbers

G181 G182 G183 G184 G185
(Front) (Left) (Rear) (Right) (Down)
(2 stations)
T301
H1 H1 H1 H1 -
(90° attachment)
T302
- - - - -
(attachment cover)
(3 stations)
T301
H1 H1 H1 H1 -
(90° attachment)
T302
- - - - -
(attachment cover)
T303
- - - - H3
(extension attachment)
(6 stations)
T301
- - - - H1
(extension attachment)
T302
- - - - -
(universal attachment)
T303
- - - - -
(special 90° attachment)
T304
H4 H4 H4 H4 -
(90° attachment)
T305 (blank) - - - - -
T306
- - - - -
(attachment cover)
6130-E P-49
Calculating the Compensation Data for a 90° Attachment
When a 90° attachment is used, it is necessary to find the attachment swivel compensation data
using the coordinate values obtained in step 5) of [Measuring the Attachment Swivel Compensation
Data] in 1-3-2.
The formula below are used to match the center of the vertical reference tool with the horizontal
reference tool nose.
Vertical reference tool
Horizontal reference tool

ME61315R0300300470001
In the explanation below, D1 represents the diameter of the reference tool mounted in the vertical
spindle and D2 the diameter of the reference tool mounted in the horizontal spindle.
 PAC = 0°
D1
X' = X +
2 D1 D2
Y' = Y Vertical reference

tool
D2 Z+
Z' = Z +
2 X+
ME61315R0300300470002
 PAC = 90°
X' = X Z+
D1
Y' = Y + Y+
2
Vertical reference
D2 tool
Z' = Z +
2
ME61315R0300300470003
 PAC = 180°
D1
X' = X +
2 Z+
X+
Y' = Y
D2
Z' = Z +
2
ME61315R0300300470004
6130-E P-50
 PAC = 270°
X' = X
Z+
D1
Y' = Y + Y+
2
D2
Z' = Z +
2
ME61315R0300300470005
6130-E P-51
1-3-3. Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool

Breakage Detection with 30° Angular Attachments (Option)
(1) Automatic Tool Length Offset Function
The automatic tool length offset function allows the measurement of tool length offset data for a
tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment.
Note that this function cannot be used to measure the cutter radius compensation data while a
tool is mounted in the 30° angular attachment.
(2) Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function

The automatic tool breakage detection function allows detection of tool breakage or excessive
wear of a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment. As with the automatic tool length offset
function, this automatic tool breakage function is unable check breakage of a tool in the radius
direction.
Operation Flow of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Detection Function
Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in the vertical spindle
↓
Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment
↓
Setting the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20])
↓
Setting the Z-axis lower limit position data
↓
Setting the zero point of the 30° angular attachment touch sensor
↓
Measuring the tool length offset data for a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment
.
.
.
Check the breakage of a tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment
.
.
.
6130-E P-52
Relative Offset Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH [20])
To use the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function with an angular
attachment other than a 90° angular attachment(30°, 45°, 60°), a special referent tool, called
reference tool B, is used to measure the attachment compensation data. Differing from the
conventionally used reference tool - called reference tool A - which has a cylindrical shape,
reference tool B has a ball-shaped nose.
When setting the touch sensor zero point, the sensor zero point in the vertical and horizontal
directions is usually determined by the length of reference tool A, which is determined by the
specification code (Bit 7 of specification code No. 24).
When setting the angular attachment touch sensor zero point, however, reference tool B is used to
set the zero point. This means the accurate length of the reference tool must be known beforehand.
The value used to calculate the length of reference tool B based on the length of reference tool A is
called the “relative offset data between reference tools”.
If a value is set for PLI, explained in [Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] on 1-3-3, setting the
“relative offset data between reference tools” is not necessary.
The relative offset data between reference tools can be obtained easily by following the procedure
indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Mount reference tool B in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing
it into contact with the reference block.
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “B”.
2 Mount reference tool A in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “A”.
3 Calculate the relative offset data between reference tools using the following formula.
Relative offset data between reference tools = Length of reference tool B

(coordinate value B)
- Length of reference tool A
(coordinate value A)
ME61315R0300300500001
6130-E P-53
Designating the Operation Mode (VFST)
or automatic tool breakage detection operation for a 30° angular attachment.

ME61315R0300300510001

Bit 0
Moves the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor
position.
0 If this setting is made although the zero point of the touch sensor and the
Bit 3 X-axis has not been set, this will cause very dangerous situation since
positioning is made to the machine zero point in this case.
1
sensor position.
Bit 7
[Supplement]
Pay attention to the setting of system variable VFST since it is also used for the automatic tool
length offset/automatic tool breakage detection functions for a vertical tool, B/C-axis attachment,
extension attachment and 90° angular attachment.
Although the operation mode is backed up in the CNC memory, you are recommended to set the
mode for each execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection
functions since the setting is also used for other applications as described above.
6130-E P-54
Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position (OO32)
When the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle is executed, a tool
must be brought into contact with the touch sensor at the right angle. Therefore, the tool is
positioned in the direction in which the touch sensor is at the right angle before executing these
cycles with the 30° angular attachment tool. The point where the tool is positioned is called the
“approach start position”.
The position where the Y-axis should be retracted to avoid interference with a workpiece before
positioning to the approach start position is called the Z-axis lower limit position.
For details on the approach start position, refer to [Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] in 1-3-3.
The Z-axis lower limit position is also used as the spindle retraction position for sensor unit advance/
retract operation for models such as MCR-B II in which the sensor unit can interfere with the spindle
during sensor unit advance/retract operation.
Note that the set Z-axis lower limit position is used for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection function of the MCM horizontal tool and the B/C-axis attachment, 90° angular
attachment and 45° angular attachment. Therefore, if these specifications are used in combination,
set the Z-axis lower limit position with care.
Procedure :
In this operation, the Z- and X-axis may be at any position.
2 At this position, execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode.
CALLOO32
When this program is executed, the axes do not move.
6130-E P-55
Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point
Before executing the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function using
the 30° angular attachment, it is necessary to set the zero point of the touch sensor.
Follow the procedure indicated below to set the touch sensor zero point.
Procedure :
1 Set the VFST (operation mode) in the MDI or automatic mode.

For this operation, only bit 7 (relative/absolute offset type selection) has significance. For other
bits “0” may be set.
2 Execute M144 (sensor unit advance) in the MDI or automatic mode.

Pay attention to the execution of M144 since the sensor unit may interfere with the spindle on
some models.
3 Mount reference tool B to the 30° angular attachment and orient the attachment.
4 Position the tool approximately 10 mm (0.39 in.) away from the touch sensor so that it will
contact the touch sensor at the right angle when it is moved in the tool length direction.
5 Select the MDI or automatic mode and execute the following program.
CALL OO34 PAXI=#07H
After the execution of the program above, the touch sensor zero point coordinate values (X, Y,
Z) are set using the designation for PAXI.
For details of PAXI designation, refer to [Variables] in 1-3-3.
Note the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20]) is used since PLI is not
designated.
[Supplement]
If PLI is designated, the value to be transferred differs depending on the tool length offset type
(VFST setting). For the absolute offset type, set the length of reference tool B from the gauge line
to PLI. In the case of the relative offset type, set the relative length of reference tool B in reference
to reference tool A.
For details on the relative offset data between the reference tools, refer to [Relative Offset Data
between Reference Tools (VSTOH [20])] in 1-3-3.
How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [Reference Tool
Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting] in 1-3-3.
The result is fed back as the zero point data to system work coordinate system No. 13.
The set zero point data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up
6130-E P-56
Reference Tool Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting
During the execution of the touch sensor zero point setting for a 30° angular attachment, the
reference tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(1) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y- and Z-axis).
The approach start point is calculated on a line extended from the 30° angular attachment touch
sensor in the tool length direction. The following two positions are calculated on the extended
line: the position where the Z-axis is at the travel limit in the positive direction and the position
where the Y-axis is at the lower end limit position of the Z-axis. Of these two positions, the
position that is closer to the touch sensor is taken as the approach start point.
Since the sensor position has not been measured at the start of touch sensor zero point setting,
the position 10 mm ahead of the point where the tool was moved in step 4) of the operation
described in [Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] on 1-3-3 is regarded as the 30° angular
attachment touch sensor position.
(3) The reference tool moves the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis).
(4) The sensor unit retracts.
(5) The sensor unit advances.
(6) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y-axis).
(7) The reference tool is brought into contact with the sensor (Z- and Y-axis).
(8) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Z- and Y-axis).
(9) The reference tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1)
(10) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET ≠ 1)

This completes the setting of the touch sensor zero point.
6130-E P-57
Automatic Tool Length Offset Function
To measure the tool length of the tool mounted in the 30° angular attachment, follow the procedure
indicated below.
[Supplement]
Before executing automatic tool length offset, make sure that the zero point of the touch sensor
has been set.
Procedure :

For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits “0” may be set.
 Bit 7 (relative/absolute offset type selection)

Set the same value as set in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
 Bit 3 (X-axis positioning valid/invalid)

“0” (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the zero point in
the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
If “0” is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it could be dangerous since
the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.
 Bit 0 (automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection selection)

Since the operation to be performed is “automatic tool length offset”, “1” should be set
here.
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the 30° angular
attachment and set the angular attachment direction.
If the tool is mounted manually, the PH parameter must be specified since the tool number is
unknown.
The obtained offset data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number transferred by
the PH parameter.
The PH parameter does not have to be designated if the tool is mounted using an M code
command.
3 Execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode.
CALL OO34 (PLI=Anticipated tool length) (PH=Tool number)
When the program is executed, the tool length is measured.
The measured tool length data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number
transferred by PH. If no PH parameter is specified, the data is set as the tool length offset data
of the active tool number.
[Supplement]
If an anticipated tool length is not set, the minimum tool length is used as the anticipated tool
length.
Therefore, the minimum tool length must be set beforehand for optional parameter (long word)
No. 43, as an absolute value in mm units.
If the setting for this parameter is inappropriate, the 30° angular attachment may interfere with the
sensor unit. Set a value 10 mm (0.39 in.) longer than the minimum measurable length
(determined by the machine specification) as the minimum tool length.
If the minimum measurable length is set as the minimum tool length, the 30° angular attachment
will strike the sensor unit if the tool fails to contact the sensor.
6130-E P-58
Machine operation
During the execution of automatic tool length offset for the tool mounted in the 30° angular
attachment, the tool moves as indicated below.
(1) The Z-axis moves up 1 mm (0.04 in.) from the actual position or to the travel end in the positive
(+) direction.
If positioning of the X-axis is valid, X-axis positioning is executed.
(3) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis).
(5) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis).
If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length position
(Z-, Y-axis).
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor (Z-, Y-axis).
(8) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET ≠ 1)
Tool Change Position Setting Function
When the automatic tool breakage detection cycle detects a tool has been broken, the broken tool
When a tool is returned to the magazine, it may interfere with a workpiece, depending on the shape
of the workpiece. To avoid this, it is necessary to retract the workpiece. The tool change position
setting function is used to set the tool change position for this purpose.
The spindle is moved to the tool change position by X- and Y-axis movements. Note that whether or
not the X-axis moves is determined by the setting for bit 3 of VFST. The X-axis moves only when “0”
is set for this bit.
Procedure :
1 Move the spindle to the desired tool change position on the Y-axis.
If the setting that enables X-axis movements is made, move the X-axis also.
CALL OO31
After the execution of the program, the actual position is set for system work coordinate system
No. 2 as the tool change position.
(VSZO*[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
6130-E P-59
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Automatic tool breakage detection is executed in the manner indicated below for the tool mounted in
the 30° angular attachment.
[Supplement]
Before executing automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the touch
sensor has been set.
Procedure :




here.
unknown.
The function compares the measured data to the tool length offset data of the tool offset
number transferred by PH to judge breakage of the tool.
command.
CALL OO34 (PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value)

(PLE2=Offset value update permissible amount)
(PGO=Processing at the occurrence of tool breakage)
ME61315R0300300570001
 Tool breakage judgment value (PLE1)

If no value is set for PLE1, the judgment value is taken to be 0.1 mm (0.004 in.).
The tool is judged to be broken if the absolute value of the difference between the preset
tool length and the measured tool length is larger than the judgment value set for PLE1.
 Offset value update permissible amount (PLE2)

When a value is set for PLE2, the present tool length offset data is updated to the
measured tool length assuming that the absolute value of the difference between the
preset tool length and the measured tool length is smaller than the judgment value set for
PLE1 and larger than the offset value update permissible amount.
6130-E P-60
 Processing on occurrence of tool breakage (PGO)

If a tool is detected to have been broken while no value is set for PGO, an alarm occurs
and the tool breakage detection cycle ends without returning the broken tool to the
magazine.
If a value is set for PGO to select the processing on occurrence of tool breakage, the
specified processing is executed without generating an alarm when tool breakage is
detected.
PGO = 1: The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change
position.
PGO = 2: The tool is returned after positioning to the tool change position.
PGO = 3: The tool is not returned to the magazine.
Since no alarm occurs if a value is set for PGO, it is necessary to judge tool breakage in a
program.
For details on judgment of tool breakage in a program, refer to [Judgment for Tool
Breakage] in 1-3-3.
Machine Operation
During the execution of the automatic tool breakage detection for the tool mounted in the 30°
angular attachment, the tool moves as indicated below.
(+) direction.
(Z-, Y-axis).
(7) The tool is assessed for breakage.

The processing after the detection of tool breakage depends on the setting for PGO.
 PGO = 1:
The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change position.
 PGO = 2:
The tool is returned after positioning of the X- and Y-axis to the tool change position.
6130-E P-61
Judgment for Tool Breakage
When a spare tool is selected on detection of tool breakage, the machine is not stopped by an alarm
even if the breakage of a tool is detected. Therefore, it is necessary to judge whether or not a tool is
broken at the end of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle and branch a part program
according to the result of the judgment.
 System variable VOK1

VOK1 = 0: The tool is not broken.
VOK1 ≠ 0: The tool is broken.
System variable VOK1 stores the result of the tool breakage detection cycle executed
immediately before its designation.

System variable VOK2 is also used for storing the result of the tool breakage detection cycle.
Differing from system variable VOK1, it indicates the occurrence of tool breakage in all
detection cycles executed after it has been reset to 0 (VOK2 = 0). If tool breakage is detected
even once in these cycles, the value of VOK2 is not 0 (VOK2 ≠ 0).
 VOK1 and VOK2 are not reset by resetting the CNC.
[Supplement]
The tool number of the tool which has been judged to be broken in a tool breakage detection
cycle is registered as a broken tool by the tool management function.
To use the same tool number after replacing the broken tool with a new one, it is necessary to
reset the registered broken tool status.
For the procedure for resetting this status, refer to Tool Management Function in the special
specifications of the Operation Manual.
6130-E P-62
Variables
Variables used in the subroutines that execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection for the 30° angular attachment.
PH: Tool offset number
Used to designate a tool offset number if a tool offset number different from the tool
number of the active tool is used for automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection.
PAXI: One byte (8 bits) transfer variable used when the sensor zero point is set. Each bit has
the following meaning.
PAXI Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

ME61315R0300300590001
Bit No. Description

Bit 0 Sets the X-axis zero point.
Bit 1 Sets the Y-axis zero point.
Bit 2 Sets the Z-axis zero point.
Bit 3 Always set “0”.
VFST: Designates the operation mode. For details refer to [Designating the Operation Mode
(VFST)] in 1-3-3.
PLE1: Designates the tool breakage judgment value. For details refer to [Automatic Tool
Breakage Detection] in 1-3-3.
PLE2: Designates the offset value update permissible amount. For details, refer to [Automatic
Tool Breakage Detection] in 1-3-3.
PLI: Designates the length of the reference tool when setting the touch sensor zero point.
Designates the anticipated tool length when measuring the tool length.
PRS: This is an RS command for multi-point spindle orientation operation.
PRET: Touch sensor retraction preventive command
This is a function to prevent touch sensor retraction at the end of the touch sensor zero
point setting, automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection.
PGO: Designates the processing to be followed on detection of tool breakage. For details, refer
to [Automatic Tool Breakage Detection] in 1-3-3.
PX: Designates the displacement in the X-axis direction during positioning to the sensor
position.
6130-E P-63


direction.

Detection Function
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
.
.
.
.
.
.
6130-E P-64
Relative Offset Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH[20])
attachment other than a 90° angular attachment (30°, 45°, 60°), a special referent tool, called
set the zero point. This means the accurate length of the reference tool must be known beforehand.
called the “relative offset data between reference tools”.
If a value is set for PLI, explained in [Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] on 1-3-4, setting the
“relative offset data between reference tools” is not necessary.
indicated below.
Procedure :
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “B”.
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be “A”.
Relative offset data between reference tools = Length of reference tool B

(coordinate value B)
- Length of reference tool A
(coordinate value A)
ME61315R0300300620001
6130-E P-65

ME61315R0300300630001

0
1 0 Always set “0”.
position.
3 X-axis has not been set, this will cause very dangerous situation since
1
sensor position.
7
[Supplement]
6130-E P-66
“approach start position”.
breakage detection function of the MCM horizontal tool and the B/C-axis attachment, 90° angular
attachment and 30° angular attachment. Therefore, if these specifications are used in combination,
set the Z-axis lower limit position with care.
Procedure :
CALLOO32
6130-E P-67
Procedure :

bits “0” may be set.

some models.
contact the touch sensor at the right angle when it is moved in the tool length direction.
CALL OO87 PAXI=#07H
designated.
[Supplement]
6130-E P-68
Machine operation
the position 10 mm (0.39 in.) ahead of the point where the tool was moved in step 4) of the
operation described in [Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] in 1-3-4 is regarded as the 45°
angular attachment touch sensor position.

6130-E P-69
indicated below.
[Supplement]
has been set.
Procedure :




here.
unknown.
the PH parameter.
command.
[Supplement]
length.
6130-E P-70
Machine operation
(+) direction.
(Z-, Y-axis).
not the X-axis moves is determined by the setting for bit 3 of VFST. The X-axis moves only when “0”
Procedure :
CALL OO31
6130-E P-71
[Supplement]
Procedure :




here.
unknown.
command.

ME61315R0300300690001


6130-E P-72

magazine.
detected.
position.
program.
Breakage] in 1-3-4.
Machine Operation
(+) direction.
(Z-, Y-axis).

 PGO = 1:
 PGO = 2:
6130-E P-73


[Supplement]
6130-E P-74
Variables
detection.

ME61315R0300300710001
Bit No. Description

0 Sets the X-axis zero point.
1 Sets the Y-axis zero point.
2 Sets the Z-axis zero point.
3 Always set “0”.
(VFST)] in 1-3-4.
position.
6130-E P-75


direction.

Detection Function
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
:
:
:
:
:
:
6130-E P-76
Relative Offset Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH[20])
attachment other than a 90° angular attachment (30°, 45°, 60°), a special reference tool, called
set the zero point. This means the accurate length of the reference tool B must be known
beforehand.
called the "relative offset data between reference tools".
If a value is set for PLI, explained in [Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point], setting the "relative offset
data between reference tools" in 1-3-5 is not necessary.
indicated below.
Procedure :
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be "B".
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be "A".
Relative offset data between reference tools = Length of reference tool B (coordinate value B)
- Length of reference tool A (coordinate value A)
ME61315R0300300910001
4 Set the relative offset data between reference tools.

Select the MDI operation mode.
VSTOH[20] = (the relative offset data between reference tools deteremined in step 3)
Press the Start button.
6130-E P-77
Use system variable "VFST" to designate the basic operation modes for automatic tool length offset

ME61315R0300300920001

0
1 0
Always set "0".
2 0
position.
3 X-axis has not been set, this will cause very dangerous situation since
1
sensor position.
4 0
5 0 Always set "0".
6 0
7
[Supplement]
6130-E P-78
"approach start position".
breakage detection function of the MCM horizontal tool, B/C-axis attachment, 90° angular
attachment, 30° angular attachment, and 45° angular attachment. Therefore, if these specifications
are used in combination, set the Z-axis lower limit position with care.
Procedure :
1 1 Move the Y-axis to the position where the Z-axis lower limit position is to be set.
CALL OO32
6130-E P-79
Procedure :

bits "0" may be set.

some models.
contact the touch sensor when it is moved in the tool length direction.
CALL OO59 PAXI=#07H
designated.
[Supplement]
6130-E P-80
Machine operation
the position 10 mm (0.39 in.) ahead of the point where the tool was moved in step 4) of the
operation described in [Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] in 1-3-5 is regarded as the 60°
angular attachment touch sensor position.

6130-E P-81
indicated below.
[Supplement]
has been set.
Procedure :

For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits "0" may be set.


"0" (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the X-axis zero
point in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
If "0" (X-axis positioning valid) is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it
could be dangerous since the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.

Since the operation to be performed is "automatic tool length offset", "1" should be set
here.
unknown.
the PH parameter.
command.
[Supplement]
length.
6130-E P-82
Machine operation
(1) The Z-axis moves up +1000 mm (39.37 in.) from the actual position or to the travel end in the
positive (+) direction.
(Z-, Y-axis).
not the X-axis moves is determined by the setting for bit 3 of VFST. The X-axis moves only when "0"
Procedure :
CALL OO31
6130-E P-83
[Supplement]
Procedure :

For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits "0" may be set.


"0" (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the X-axis zero
point in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
If "0" (X-axis positioning valid) is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it
could be dangerous since the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.

Since the operation to be performed is "automatic tool length offset", "0" should be set
here.
unknown.
command.

ME61315R0300300980001


6130-E P-84

magazine.
detected.
position.
program.
Breakage] in 1-3-5.
Machine Operation
(1) The Z-axis moves up +1000 mm (39.37 in.) from the actual position or to the travel end in
the positive (+) direction.
If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length
position (Z-, Y-axis).

 PGO = 1:
 PGO = 2:
6130-E P-85


[Supplement]
6130-E P-86
Variables
detection.

ME61315R0300301000001
Bit No. Description

0 Sets the X-axis zero point.
1 Sets the Y-axis zero point.
2 Sets the Z-axis zero point.
3
4
5 Always set "0".
6
7
(VFST)] in 1-3-5.
position.
6130-E P-87
1-4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)

During execution of automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation) or tool breakage
detection on the vertical or horizontal spindle of MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A, the tool may interfere
with the touch sensor unit cover.
With VH-40, execution of automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection may also cause
interference between the table and the touch sensor unit.
In order to prevent such interference, the Y-axis escape cycle should be executed after setting the Y-
axis escape position.
1-4-1. Setting the Y-axis Escape Position

Setting the Y-axis Escape Position for the Vertical Spindle
Set the Y-axis escape position for the vertical spindle (includes VH-40) by following the procedure
indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the desired Y-axis escape position.

CALL OO33
M02
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Y-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 12 as the Y-axis escape position.
Setting the Y-axis Escape Position for the Horizontal Spindle

Set the Y-axis escape position for the vertical spindle by following the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the desired Y-axis escape position.

CALL OO32
M02
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Y-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 9 as the Y-axis escape position.
6130-E P-88
[Supplement]
1) Since system work coordinate systems No. 9 and No. 12 are used exclusively for automatic
tool length offset (cutter radius compensation) and automatic tool breakage detection
functions, they cannot normally be set or referenced.
2) Set the Y-axis escape position at a position where interference between the tool and the touch
sensor unit cover will not occur.
1-4-2. Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset (Cutter

Radius Compensation)/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
During automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection,
the tool moves as indicated below.
(The automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation) and the automatic tool breakage
detection are the optional functions.)
Machine operation in the case of vertical machining center (including VH-40)
(2) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the Y-axis escape position (the position set at system
work coordinate system No. 12).
(4) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back* once and then moves forward.
* The sensor unit does not move back if it is already at the retract end position.
sensor.
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor according to the selected cycle (automatic
tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle).
[Supplement]
With the VH-40, since the touch sensor zero point in the Y-axis direction is set at the same
position as the Y-axis escape position, only the X-axis moves in step 5).
Machine operation in the case of horizontal machining center
(4) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back* once and then moves forward.
6130-E P-89
* The sensor unit does not move back if it is already at the retract end position.
sensor.
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor according to the selected cycle (automatic
tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle).
6130-E P-90
1-5. Interference Prevention Measures for MCV-A/MCV-A II

During Execution of the Automatic Tool Length Offset/
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
This function prevents interference between the touch sensor and the coolant trough, and between
the spindle tool and the chip cover, during the execution of the automatic tool length offset (cutter
radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the MCV-A/MCV-A II.
To make this function valid, set “1” for CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 4.
1-5-1. Touch Sensor Operation Interlock

A notch is provided in the coolant trough and the touch sensor zero point is set above the notch to
prevent interference of the coolant trough with the touch sensor.
Touch sensor advance is enabled only at the touch sensor zero point. If the M144 command (touch
sensor advance) is executed although the X-axis is not at the touch sensor zero point, the touch
sensor does not move and the following alarm occurs.
The touch sensor can be advanced only through the notched part.
2727 Alarm B Improper M code
The X-axis touch sensor zero point described here is the position set by touch sensor zero point
setting in the Z-axis direction and means the X-axis coordinate value in the system work coordinate
system No. 1.
1-5-2. Measures against Interference during Execution of the Automatic

Tool Length Offset/Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
In order to avoid interference between the tool and the chip cover, the X-axis touch sensor zero
point must be set at the center of the notch provided in the chip cover so that the tool crosses the
chip cover through that point.
6130-E P-91
Provisional Setting of the X-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point
Since the M144 command (touch sensor advance) is invalid unless the X-axis is located at the touch
sensor zero point, the provisional X-axis zero point must be set before setting the X-axis touch
sensor zero point.
Note that this setting is not necessary when adjusting a touch sensor zero point that has already
been set.
Procedure :
1 Move the X-axis by manual operation to align the touch sensor with the center of the notch in
the coolant trough.
2 Select the MDI mode and execute “VFST=**”.

For “**” set an appropriate value by referring to [1-6-3. How to Use Variables]. Here, the
operation mode may be either automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage
detection.
3 Select the MDI mode and execute “VSZOX[1]=VRCOX-VMOFX”.
4 Execute M144.
[Supplement]
Set the touch sensor zero point in the Z direction by designating “PAXI=7”.
Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Before executing the automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection cycle, set “0” for bit 3 of
VFST to enable X-axis movement.
VFST setting for the execution of the automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage
detection cycle
 Relative offset
Automatic tool length offset: 1
Automatic tool breakage detection: 0
 Absolute offset
Automatic tool length offset: #81H
Automatic tool breakage detection: #80H
This instruction manual specifies that the tool moves to the touch sensor position during the
execution of an automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection cycle in the following
sequence:
Z-axis upper limit → Y-axis touch sensor position → X-axis touch sensor position.
In this order of tool movements, however, the tool will interfere with the chip cover.
The setting indicated above changes the order to:
Z-axis upper limit → Z-axis touch sensor position → Y-axis touch sensor position.
Similarly, if “PGO = 2” is designated, the order of tool movements to the tool change position (the
position set by the execution of OO31), where the tool moves after the detection of tool breakage, is
changed to:
Z-axis upper limit → Y-axis tool change position → X-axis tool change position.
6130-E P-92
1-6. Variables Used in Subprograms

The basic command format of the automatic tool length offset function and the automatic tool
breakage detection function was explained in the previous subsections.
In this subsection, the variables necessary to make effective use of these functions are described.
1-6-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables
Variable
Variables for which a
Subprogra Variables for which a which
Numerical Value Should be
m Name Numerical Value Must be Set Must not
Set as Needed
be Used
Setting of Z-axis OO30 PAXI: PLI: Accurate tool length None
touch sensor zero =3 Setting of X- and Y- of reference tool
point axis zero points used in setting the
=4 Setting of Z-axis zero point
zero point PRS: Spindle orientation
=7 Setting of X-, Y- and angle
Z-axis zero points PRET: Sensor does not
VFST: Operation mode =1 retract.
PH: Tool length offset
number
PD: Cutter radius
compensation
number
Setting of Y-axis OO30 PAXI: PRS: Spindle orientation None
touch sensor zero =#17H Setting of X-, Y- and angle
point Z-axis zero points PRET:
VFST: Operation mode =1 Sensor does not
PLI: Accurate tool length retract.
of reference tool PH: Tool length offset
used in setting the number
zero point PD: Cutter radius
PY: Accurate cutter compensation
radius of reference number
tool used in setting
the zero point
Setting of tool OO31 None None None
change position
(Not necessary
for MC-H)
6130-E P-93
Variable
Set as Needed
be Used
Automatic tool OO30 VFST: Operation mode PLI: Anticipated tool PAXI
length offset PY: Approximate length
displacement of tool PX: Approximate
nose in the Y-axis displacement of tool
direction from the nose in the X-axis
center of the spindle direction from the
(i.e., cutter radius) center of the
Always set when spindle+/- values are
executing Y-axis possible.
automatic tool offset PY: Approximate
displacement of tool
nose in the Y-axis
direction from the
center of the
spindle+/- values are
possible.
PFA: Feedrate for the
movement from the
sensor to
undertravel point,
PUDT (safety
distance)
PF1: Skip feedrate for the
first contact
detection cycle
second contact
detection cycle
PRS: Spindle orientation
angle
PRET:
=1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
PD: Cutter radius
compensation
number
6130-E P-94
Variable
Set as Needed
be Used
Automatic tool OO30 VFST: Operation mode PX: Approximate PAXI
breakage PY: Approximate displacement of the
detection displacement of the tool nose in the X-
tool nose in the Y- axis direction from
axis direction from the center of the
the center of the spindle +/- values
spindle (i.e., cutter are possible.
radius) PY: Approximate
Always set when displacement of the
executing Y-axis tool nose in the Y-
automatic tool axis direction from
breakage detection the center of the
spindle +/- values
are possible.
PLE1: Z-axis direction tool
breakage judgment
value
PLEY: Y-axis direction tool
breakage judgment
value
PLE2: Offset value update
permissible amount
PGO: Processing on
occurrence of tool
breakage
angle
PRET:
=1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
PD: Cutter radius
compensation
number
movement from the
sensor to the
undertravel point,
PUDT (safety
distance)
first contact
detection cycle
second contact
detection cycle
6130-E P-95
1-6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools)
Variable
Set as Needed
be Used
Setting of tool OO30 PAXI: PLI: Accurate tool length None
length direction =#23H Setting of X- and Y- of reference tool
touch sensor zero axis zero points used in setting the
point =#24H Setting of Z-axis zero point
(Y-axis) zero point PRS: Spindle orientation
=#27H Setting of X-, Y- and angle
Z-axis zero points PRET:
VFST: Operation mode =1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
PD: Cutter radius
compensation
number
Setting of tool OO30 PAXI PRS: Spindle orientation None
radius direction =#47H Setting of X-, Y- and angle
touch sensor zero Z-axis zero points PRET:
point VFST: Operation mode =1 Sensor does not
(Z-axis) PLI: Accurate tool length retract.
of reference tool PH: Tool length offset
used in setting the number
zero point PD: Cutter radius
PZ: Accurate cutter compensation
radius of reference number
tool used in setting
the zero point
Z-axis lower limit OO32 None None None
setting
6130-E P-96
Variable
Set as Needed
be Used
Automatic tool OO30 VFST: Operation mode PLI: Anticipated tool PAXI
length offset PZ: Approximate length
displacement of tool PX: Approximate
nose in the tool displacement of tool
radius direction (Z- nose in the X-axis
axis direction) direction from the
Always set when center of the spindle
executing automatic PZ: Approximate
tool length offset in displacement of tool
the tool radius nose in the Z-axis
direction direction from the
center of the spindle
movement from the
sensor to the
undertravel point,
PUDT (safety
distance)
first contact
detection cycle
second contact
detection cycle
angle
PRET:
=1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
PD: Cutter radius
compensation
number
6130-E P-97
Variable
Set as Needed
be Used
Automatic tool OO30 VFST: Operation mode PX: Approximate PAXI
breakage PZ: Approximate displacement of tool
detection displacement of tool nose in the X-axis
nose in the tool direction from the
radius direction (Z- center of the spindle
axis direction) PZ: Approximate
Always set when displacement of tool
executing automatic nose in the Z-axis
tool length offset in direction from the
the tool radius center of the spindle
direction PLE1: Tool length direction
(Y-axis direction) tool
breakage judgment
value
PLEZ: Tool radius direction
(Z-axis direction) tool
breakage judgment
value
PLE2: Offset value update
permissible amount
PGO: Processing on
occurrence of tool
breakage
angle
PRET:
=1 Sensor does not
retract.
number
PD: Cutter radius
compensation
number
movement from the
sensor to the
undertravel point,
PUDT (safety
distance)
first contact
detection cycle
second contact
detection cycle
6130-E P-98
1-6-3. How to Use Variables

The following describes how the variables given in the tables in [1-6-1. Table of Subprograms and
Variables] and [1-6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools)] are used.
Note the numerical values must be in the units presently in use.
(1) VFST (V FIRST)
 VFST sets the basic operation mode for automatic tool length offset and automatic tool
breakage detection cycles.
 Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be
designated once: it does not have to be set each time OO30 is called.
 The automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection cycles can be
executed even in the same part program. In this case, set “1” for bit 0 of VFST when
executing an automatic tool length offset cycle. To execute an automatic tool breakage
detection cycle, set “0” for bit 0 of VFST.
 VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.
ME61315R0300300830001

Bit 0
Executes an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
Bit 1 1
breakage detection cycle in the tool radius direction.
breakage detection cycle in the Y-axis direction after the
execution of an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
Bit 2 1 breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis direction.
To execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle only in the Z-axis direction, set “0”
for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.
Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool
at the touch sensor position.
Bit 3 1 Set “1” for Bit 3 with machine models such as MCV, MCM
and MCR in which the touch sensor is installed
independently of the X-axis movement.
Does not execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic
0
tool breakage detection cycle for MCM horizontal tools.
Bit 6
1
breakage detection cycle for MCM horizontal tools.
Bit 7
6130-E P-99
(2) PLE1 (P LENGTH ERR 1)
 This indicates the tool breakage judgment value and must be set as an absolute value.
 A tool is judged to have been broken if:

PLE1 < | (Preset tool length offset data) - (Measured tool length) |
 If PLE1 is not set when executing a tool breakage detection cycle, 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) is
automatically set for PLE1 in the subprogram.
(3) PLE2 (P LENGTH ERR 2)
 This indicates the permissible offset update value and must be set as an absolute value.
 If tool breakage is not detected in a tool breakage detection cycle and the following
condition is satisfied, the tool length offset data is updated according to the measured tool
length.
PLE2 < | (Preset tool length offset data) - (Measured tool length) | < PLE1
 As the tool length offset data is updated each time the cycle is executed, it must be
carefully attended to in reference to the occurrence of tool breakage. When PLE2 is not
set, the tool length offset data is not updated.
(4) PLEY (P LENGTH ERROR Y-AXIS)
 This indicates the tool breakage judgment value in the Y-axis direction and must be set as
an absolute value.
 A tool is judged to have been broken if:

PLEY < | (Preset cutter radius compensation data) - (Measured cutter radius) |
 If PLE2 is not set when executing a tool breakage detection cycle, 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) is
automatically set for PLEY in the subprogram.
(5) PAXI
 This designates the axis for which the touch sensor zero point is set.
 PAXI consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.

ME61315R0300300830002
6130-E P-100
Bit No. Description

Bit 0 Sets the X-axis zero point.
Bit 1 Sets the Y-axis zero point.
Bit 2 Sets the Z-axis zero point.
0: Sets the zero point of the tool length direction touch sensor for a vertical
tool.
Bit 4
1: Sets the zero point of the tool radius direction touch sensor for a vertical
tool.
Sets the zero point of the tool length direction touch sensor for a horizontal
Bit 5
tool.
Sets the zero point of the tool radius direction touch sensor for a horizontal
Bit 6
tool.
Setting value of PAXI
Sensor Direction
Vertical Tool MCM Horizontal Tool
Axis Name Length Radius Length Radius
Direction Direction Direction Direction
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
Setting of X- and Y-axis zero
3 (#13H) #23H (#43H)
points
Setting of Z-axis zero point 4 (#14H) #24H (#44H)
Setting of X-, Y- and Z-axis
7 #17H #27H #47H
zero points
(6) PX
 This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool
(spindle) in the X-axis direction. Designation of plus and minus values is possible. When
PX is not set, “PX = 0” is automatically set in a subprogram.
 When the X- and Y-axis move to the center of the touch sensor during automatic tool length
offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the tool is positioned PX away from the
center of the touch sensor so that the tool nose is aligned with the center of the touch
sensor.
 Since the touch sensor is installed close to the travel limit, pay attention to the setting of PX
in reference to the travel limit.
(7) PY
This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool (spindle)
in the Y-axis direction. For other details, refer to the explanation for “PX”.
When setting the Y-axis zero point, an accurate cutter radius (displacement of the tool nose in
the Y-axis direction) of the reference tool used for zero point setting must be set for PY.
(8) PZ
This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool (spindle)
in the Z-axis direction. For other details, refer to the explanation for “PX”.
6130-E P-101
(9) PLI
 When setting the touch sensor zero point

Set the reference tool length for PLI.
 Relative offset type

Set the length of the reference tool used for touch sensor zero point setting in relation
to the length of the tool used for setting the zero point of the work coordinate system.
When no setting is made, it is automatically assumed that “PLI = 0”.
 Absolute offset type

Set the length of the reference tool used for touch sensor zero point setting from the
tool nose surface.
When no setting is made, it is automatically assumed that “PLI = 150 mm (5.91 in.)” or
“PLI = 200 mm (7.87 in.)”. Which of the values is used is determined by the machine
model.
 When executing the automatic tool length offset cycle

Set the anticipated tool length for PLI.

Set the relative length of the tool in reference to the reference tool (200 mm (7.87 in.)
or 150 mm (5.91 in.)).
This corresponds to dimension “a” (Tool length - Reference tool length) in the
illustration below.

Set the length of the tool between the spindle nose (gauge line) and the tool nose. This
corresponds to dimension “b” in the illustration below.
Reference tool
a b
Spindle nose surface
ME61315R0300300830003
When the tool set in the spindle moves toward the touch sensor, it advances to an
imaginary position 10 mm (0.39 in.) beyond the position where it would come into
contact with the touch sensor. If PLI is not set, the minimum tool length set for CNC
optional parameter (long word) No. 43 is taken as the tool length.
6130-E P-102
(10) PFA/PF1/PF2
These designate the approach or skip feedrate for tool movements toward the sensor.
 PFA: Feedrate for the movement from the sensor to the undertravel point, PUDT (safety
distance)
 PF1: Skip feedrate for the first contact detection cycle
 PF2: Skip feedrate for the second contact detection cycle

PFA without PLI Override valid
(anticipated tool length)
 When PFA command is not designated:
F=PF1 (automatic tool length offset)
F4000 (automatic tool breakage detection)
 When PFA command is designated:
F=PFA (automatic tool breakage detection)
PFA with PLI Override valid
(anticipated tool length)
 When PFA command is not designated:
F4000 (automatic tool breakage detection)
 When PFA command is designated:
F=PFA
Skip feedrate for the first contact Override valid
detection cycle
 When PF1 command is not designated:
F2000
 When PF1 command is designated:
F=PF1
Skip feedrate for the second Override invalid
contact detection cycle
 When PF2 command is not designated:
F1000
 When PF2 command is designated:
F=PF2
(11) PGO(P GO)

This determines the processing to be followed after the detection of tool breakage. Selection is
possible from “alarm-stop” and “spare tool selection”.
 When PGO is not set:

When a tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the
CNC stops in the alarm state after the completion of the automatic tool breakage detection
cycle.
 When the setting is “PGO = 1”:

When a tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the
broken tool is returned to the magazine after the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is
completed. Then, the execution part program is continued.
With MC-V and double-column machining centers, the tool change cycle is executed at the
X, Y coordinate positions where the cycle has been executed; therefore, do not set “PGO =
1” for these models.
6130-E P-103

This setting is not allowed for MC-H.
With MC-H, do not set PGO as “2”.
If tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the X- and
Y-axis move to the preset tool change position (Y-axis moves first and then the X-axis) after
the completion of the tool breakage detection cycle. Then, the broken tool is returned to the
magazine and the execution of the part program is continued.
The tool change position must be set beforehand by executing the tool change position
setting cycle.

Even when tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle,
the part program is executed continuously after the automatic tool breakage detection
cycle.
 When the setting is “PGO=11” (for BC-axis attachment only)

The machine operates in the same way as described in the setting of “PGO =1.”
Set “PGO=11” when the machine operation based on the setting of “PGO=1” is necessary
for BC-axis attachment.
 When the setting is “PGO=12” (for BC-axis attachment only)

The machine operates in the same way as described in the setting of “PGO =2.”
Set “PGO=12” when the machine operation based on the setting of “PGO=2” is necessary
for BC-axis attachment.
If the setting for PGO is “1”, “2”, “3”, “11” or “12”, regardless of whether or not the broken tool
is returned to the magazine, the CNC does not stop even if tool breakage is detected and a
part program continues to be executed after the completion of the tool breakage detection
cycle.
Therefore, it is necessary to judge if the tool is broken or not in a part program and follow the
necessary processing if a tool is found to have been broken.
The result of the tool breakage detection cycle is set for system variable VOK1.
VOK1 = 0: Tool has not been broken.
VOK1 ≠ 0: Tool has been broken.
If a measurement impossible alarm occurs, whatever setting is made for PGO, the CNC is
alarm-stopped after the automatic tool breakage cycle is completed.
1) Setting “PGO = 1” is not allowed with MC-V and double-column machining centers. This
setting can cause interference between the tool or the tool change arm and the workpiece if a
tool change cycle starts after an automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
2) Setting “PGO = 2” is not allowed for MC-H. This setting can cause interference between the
tool or the spindle and the workpiece in Y- or X-axis movement that follows an automatic tool
breakage detection cycle.
6130-E P-104
(12) PRS (P RS)

When using a special tool, a boring bar for example, the tool bit can fail to contact the touch
sensor if the spindle is orient stopped at the preset position. In such cases, it is necessary to
index the spindle to the desired angular position. PRS is used to set the desired spindle index
angle for such cases.
Example:In the case of the tool shown below, set “270” for PRS to index the spindle to allow tool
bit to contact the touch sensor.
Tool
Y+ Y-
Sensor
ME61315R0300300830004
Execute “CALL OO30 PRS = 270”
Y+ Y-
ME61315R0300300830005
[Supplement]
Spindle orientation is automatically executed at the travel end of the Z-axis in the positive
direction when the PRS is specified.
(13) PRET (P RETRACT)

With the retract type touch sensor, the sensor retracts after the completion of a cycle. If “1” is
set for this variable, the cycle completes with the sensor at the advanced position.
(14) PH/PD
 Offset data (tool length offset data, cutter radius compensation data) are usually set and
referenced for the offset number identical to the actual tool number. By setting PH and/or
PD, the offset data can be set for the desired offset number.
PH: Tool length offset number (default: actual tool number)
PD: Cutter radius compensation number (default: PH number)
 Setting range: 1 to The number of tool data sets

6130-E P-105
[Supplement]
Even when only cutter radius compensation is executed, it is necessary to set both PH and PD
since the tool length offset data is also referenced.
(15) VLTL (Maximum tool length)

The maximum tool length VLTL, used for the automatic tool offset and automatic tool breakage
detection cycles, is added to the system parameters. The operational step 4) in Fig. 1-1 Cycle
Time Reduction Function on 1-2-7. becomes valid according to the setting for this parameter:
 Optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 3

1: Valid
0: Invalid (initial setting)
 Optional parameter (long word) No. 44: Max. tool length data
For the maximum tool length, set the maximum tool length among the tools that will be
used.
Setting range: 0 to 999
Unit: mm
Initial setting: 0 (may be changed)
[Supplement]
Because the initial setting for the maximum tool length is “0”, an appropriate value must be set for
VLTL.
(16) PUDT (Undertravel distance (Safety clearance))

When a tool is moved towards the sensor, its feedrate is switched from a high speed to a low
speed. The position where the feedrate is switched is set for this variable in terms of the
distance from the sensor to the tool nose. See Fig. 1-1 Cycle Time Reduction Function on 1-2-
7.
Designate this variable when calling the subprogram.
If PUDT is not set, the following value is regarded as the undertravel distance.
 Automatic tool length offset cycle

Both PLI and PFA are designated: 50 mm (1.97 in.)
Either PLI or PFA is not designated: 10 mm (0.39 in.)
 Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

Undertravel distance: 5 mm (0.20 in.)
(17) POVT (Overtravel distance (Sensor damaging prevention distance))

This is provided to prevent breakage of the sensor if the sensor fails to function when the tool
contacts it.
Set the distance from the assumed sensor contact position to the position where axis feed
should stop if the sensor fails to operate.
Designate this variable when calling the subprogram. If POVT is not set, “10 mm (0.39 in.)” is
automatically set for it.
6130-E P-106
(18) PNOR
This is to switch whether to enable or disable the command M19, which is to enable or disable
spindle orientation and indexing to multiple reference points.
Value of PNOR Spindle orientation / indexing to multiple reference points
1 Disable (Do not execute M19)
Other than 1
Enable (Execute M19)
(or no value is specified)
When a CALL command is executed for OO30 (automatic tool offset/breakage detection),
specify the whether to enable or disable spindle orientation and indexing to multiple reference
points with the above argument PNOR OO30 (Automatic tool offset/breakage detection).
Spindle orientation and indexing to multiple reference points are enabled unless otherwise
specified with PNOR.
M19 is disabled for the following six patterns in OO30 when PNOR is set to 1.
 Reference point setting for Z-axis sensor on the vertical spindle
 Reference point setting for Y-axis sensor on the vertical spindle
 Reference point setting in the longitude direction for the horizontal spindle
 Reference point setting in the radius direction for the horizontal spindle
 Tool offset/breakage detection for vertical spindle
 Tool offset/breakage detection for horizontal spindle
Example:
CALL OO30 PAXI=7 PNOR=1
Spindle orientation and indexing to multiple reference point are disabled on the X, Y, and Z-axis for
reference point setting in the longitude direction for the vertical spindle
1-7. Cautions on Operation

(1) Because the sensor will not work properly if its zero point is not set, be sure to set the sensor
zero point by executing the sensor zero point setting cycle when the machine is installed. For
MCM, the zero point setting cycle must be executed for the horizontal spindle touch sensor.
 The sensor zero point is set for system work coordinate system No. 1 (Z-axis sensor) and
system work coordinate system No. 4 (Y-axis sensor).
 System work coordinate systems No. 1 and No. 4 are exclusive to automating
specifications and can neither be set by parameter setting nor referenced.
 System work coordinate systems No. 1 and No. 4 can only be checked by displaying the
MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window in the GAUGING RESULT display
screen.
(2) When setting “PGO = 2 (PGO = 12)” with MC-V or a double-column machining center, make
sure that the tool change position setting cycle has been executed.
The tool change position for the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is set for system work
coordinate system No. 2. System work coordinate system No. 2 is exclusive to automating
specifications and can neither be set by parameter setting nor referenced.
6130-E P-107
(3) An emergency stop limit switch is built into the system to protect the touch sensors. This limit
switch stops axis movement if a sensor is pushed in too far.
If this happens, the emergency stop limit indicating lamp in the control panel lights up. To
release the emergency stop condition, select the manual mode, set the emergency stop limit
release switch to valid, and retract the sensor by moving the axis with the pulse handle in the
direction in which the limit switch is released.
(4) Do not call out the automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram
while there is a remaining shift amount in manual interruption operation or while the machine is
still in the mirror image mode. If a subprogram call is attempted, a “measuring impossible”
alarm occurs.
(5) As the automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions are used in
combination with the tool management function, the operator must become fully acquainted
with the tool management function by reading its manual thoroughly before using these
functions.
(6) The explanations in this manual relate to tools that have the cutting nose at the front edge, such
as drills, taps and reamers. For tools whose cutting edge is off the center of the spindle, like
boring bars, variables PRS and PX or PY must be set in accordance with the tool nose offset
direction.
(7) The automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions cannot be
used for tools whose tool holder comes into contact with the touch sensor or touch sensor unit
before the tool nose does.
(8) Numerical values must be assigned to subprograms in the presently used unit system.
Note that the real number unit system must not be used.
(9) The cutter radius compensation mode and the local coordinate system are cancelled when an
automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram is executed and,
once cancelled, they are not restored after the completion of the subprogram.
(10) Call automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection subprograms in a work
coordinate system. An alarm occurs if a subprogram is called in the machine coordinate
system. Note that a work coordinate system cannot be altered during the execution of an
automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram.
(11) Do not use the user area as the area for storing programs, work coordinate systems, tool offset
data and common variables, automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection
subprograms.
(12) The allowable number of nesting levels of subroutines in an automatic tool length offset or tool
breakage detection subprogram is two. This means that the maximum allowable nesting level is
six when these functions are executed.
(13) Manual advance/retraction operation of the tool breakage detection unit (touch sensor)
With MCM and MCR, the touch sensor can be manually moved forwards and backwards.
a. Set the CNC operation panel mode selecting key-lock type switch to ON to enable
independent manual operation.
b. Set the selector switch to FORWARDS.
c. Press the CYCLE START button.

The cover will open and the touch sensor will move forward when the CYCLE START
button is released.
d. Set the selector switch to BACKWARDS.

6130-E P-108
e. Press the CYCLE START button.

The touch sensor will move backward and the cover will close when the CYCLE START
button is released.
f. Set the CNC operation panel mode selecting key-lock type switch to OFF to disable
independent manual operation.
(14) An alarm usually occurs if the actual tool number is “0” when a tool length offset or cutter radius
compensation cycle is executed. Therefore, you are recommended to carry out a tool change in
the MDl or automatic mode in this case.
(15) The following parameter is to switch the retract position for the tool to be retracted during tool
length offset and tool breakage detection program.
NC optional parameter bit No. 37 bit 4

Description Tool retract position
Enable command G00 which exceeds travel end limit Current position +1 mm
(0.04 in.)
Raise an alarm if a command G00 which exceeds travel
end limit is specified. Limit* -5 mm (0.20 in.)
(*) Limit that is currently valid including programmable limit, B-axis rotation control (optional)
The following shows the cycles that include tool retraction.

OO30
- Reference point setting cycle in the longitude direction
OO30 PAXI=4 VFST=#80H
for the vertical spindle
- Reference point setting cycle in the radius direction for
OO30 PAXI=#12H VFST=#80H
the vertical spindle
- Tool length offset/breakage detection cycle for vertical
OO30 VFST=#80H
spindle
- Tool length offset/breakage detection cycle for
OO30 PAT=1 VFST=#C0H
horizontal spindle
- Z-axis retraction upon tool breakage alarm OO30 VFST=#80H
OO34 (30° AT gauging)
OO34 VFST=#80H
spindle
OO87 (45° AT gauging)
OO87 VFST=#80H
spindle
6130-E P-109
1-8. Program Examples
1-8-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset

T2 T6
PY=30 (1.18)
Drill Boring bar
ME61315R0300300850001
N1 T2
N2 M6
N3 T6
N4 CALL OO30 VFST=1 (PLI=40) (PF1=1000) Tool length offset cycle for T2
PLI: Anticipated tool length (relative length) in
reference to the standard tool
PF1: First approach feedrate
N5 M6
N6 T5
N7 CALL OO30 PY=30 Tool length offset cycle for T6
PY: Tool nose offset amount from the spindle
center (Y direction) = 30 mm (1.18 in.)
N8 M6
:
:
ME61315R0300300850002
6130-E P-110
N1 T2
N2 M6
N3 T6
N4 CALL OO30 VFST=#81H (PLI=240) (PF1=1500) Tool length offset cycle for T2
PLI: Anticipated tool length (absolute length)
N5 M6
N6 T5
N7 CALL OO30 PY=30 Tool length offset cycle for T6
N8 M6
:
:
ME61315R0300300850003
Commands in ( ) may be omitted.

It is not necessary to set variable VFST every time a tool length offset cycle is called. As has been
explained, the touch sensor zero point must be set before the execution of an automatic tool length
offset cycle. For the setting of the touch sensor zero point, select the same offset type (relative or
absolute) as the type used for the automatic tool length offset cycle.
6130-E P-111
1-8-2. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

 Alarm stop
T3
PY=30 (1.18)
Boring bar
ME61315R0300300860001
N1 T1 T1: Drill
N2 M6
N3 T3 T3: Boring bar
N4 S300
N5 G81 G56 X40 Y20 Z-30 R3 F80 H1
:
:
:
N12 CALL OO30 VFST=0 (PLE1=0.2)*1 (PLE2=0.05) Tool breakage detection cycle for T1
PLE1: Tool breakage judgment value
= 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
PLE2: Offset value update permissible amount
= 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
N13 M6
N14 T2
N15 G0 X30 Y10 If no tool breakage judgment value is set,
"0.1 mm (0.004 in.)" is automatically set as the
tool breakage judgment value.
:
:
N29 CALL OO30 PY=30 (PLE1=0.1) Tool breakage detection cycle for T3
PY: Off-center amount of tool nose:
30 mm (1.18 in.)
:
:
ME61315R0300300860002
When the tool is judged “broken”, i.e., when the measured tool length is smaller than the set tool
breakage judgment value, the operation stops in an alarm state on completion of the cycle (Z-axis
positioned at travel end in the positive direction).
6130-E P-112
*1: Tool length offset data is updated when variable “PLE2” is set.
When the tool length measured in the tool breakage detection cycle is 0.051 mm (0.00201 in.)
to 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) (the range set by “PLE1” and “PLE2”) shorter than the initial tool length
measured in the automatic tool length offset cycle, the tool length offset data is automatically
updated based on the tool length measured in the tool breakage detection cycle to
compensate for the tool wear amount.
When no “PLE2” data is set, the tool length offset data is not updated.
 Automatic spare tool selection (MC-H)
T1 T3
PY=30 (1.18)
Drill Boring bar
ME61315R0300300860003
6130-E P-113
N1 T1 T1: Drill
N2 M6
N3 T3 T3: Boring bar
N4 G0 X40 Y10 S300
N5 G56 Z40 H1* M3
:
:
:
N18 CALL OO30 VFST=0 (PLE1=0.1) PGO=1 Tool breakage detection cycle for T1
PLE1: Tool breakage judgment value = 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
N19 IF [VOK1 NE 0]N999 Jump to N999 if tool is judged "broken"
VOK1: Judgment for tool breakage
N20 M6
N21 T9
N22 G0 X100 Y20
N23 G56 Z20 H3
:
:
N42 CALL OO30 PY=30 PGO=1 Tool breakage detection cycle for T3
PY: Tool nose offset amount from the spindle center
= 30 mm (1.18 in.)
:
:
N999 M60 Pallet change command
Part program for the next workpiece If a broken tool is called in this program, a spare tool is
automatically selected from the same tool group.
At the same time as the spare tool is selected, the tool
offset data is rewritten to the offset data of the selected
spare tool. The cutter radius compensation data is
rewritten also.
ME61315R0300300860004
It is not necessary to set variable VFST every time an automatic tool breakage detection cycle is
called.
*: HA may be designated instead of H1. For details, refer to special specifications of the Operation
Manual.
6130-E P-114
1-9. Alarm
1-9-1. Alarm List
Alarm Probable Cause Measures to Take

ALARM-B 2305 At the end of the gauging impossible Refer to the Gauging Impossible Cause
UNTENDED: message, the cause code is displayed. Code List and eliminate the cause.
gauging impossible
ALARM-B
2305 UNTENDED:
gauging impossible ××
↑
Cause code
ME61315R0300300870001
ALARM-B 2311 An attempt is made to execute the tool Check the VFST setting.
UNTENDED: breakage detection cycle although the
no subprogram function corresponding specification is not
supported.
ALARM-B 2309 Tool breakage is detected in the tool
UNTENDED: breakage detection cycle.
tool breakage
ALARM-B 2231 Tool number is “0”. When a tool is changed manually, the
Direct of subscript PH and/or PD setting is wrong. active tool number must be set.
ALARM-B 2308  The PAT command value is out of
UNTENDED: the specifiable range (outside the
command missing range 1 to 7).
 Wrong PAT command
 The PAT command is not
designated although “1” is set for
VFST, bit 6.
ALARM-B 2268 The value assigned to PLI is too large. Do not set a value larger than the
Plus travel limit over maximum measurable tool length for
PLI.
For the allowable maximum length of
the tool to be measured, refer to your
final machine/control specifications.
The value set for the zero point of the Set the touch sensor zero point again.
touch sensor is incorrect. Be sure to use the same offset type
The touch sensor zero point has been (relative/absolute) for the setting and
set in the relative offset type but measurement.
measurement is executed in the
absolute offset type, or the touch sensor
zero point has been set in the absolute
offset type but measurement is
executed in the relative offset type.
6130-E P-115

ALARM-B 2269 The value set for CNC optional Do not set a value smaller than the
Minus travel limit over parameter (long word) No. 43 minimum measurable tool length for
(measurable minimum tool length) is too CNC optional parameter (long word) No.
small. 43.
For the minimum allowable length of the
tool to be measured, refer to your final
machine/control specifications.
The value assigned to PLI is too small. Do not specify a value smaller than the
minimum measurable tool length for PLI.
For the maximum allowable length of
the tool to be measured, refer to your
final machine/control specifications.
The touch sensor zero point has been Set the touch sensor zero point again.
set in the relative offset type but Be sure to use the same offset type
measurement is executed in the (relative/absolute) for the setting and
absolute offset type, or the touch sensor measurement.
zero point has been set in the absolute
offset type but measurement is
executed in the relative offset type.
1-9-2. Gauging Impossible Cause Code List <Alarm B 2305>
Code Used
Probable Cause Measures to Take
(HEX) Subprograms
1 A maker subprogram is called while Call a maker subprogram after OO10
the machine coordinate system (H0) is selecting a work coordinate system OO30
selected. (G15 H1, for example). OO50
2 The mirror image function is active. Cancel the mirror image function first. OO10
OO30
OO50
3 Manual shift amount (total) remains. Cancel the manual shift amount (total) OO10
to zero. OO30
OO50
4 In the G11 mode (parallel or rotation Cancel the G11 mode first. OO10
shift of a coordinate)
5 In the G51 mode (graphics Cancel the G51 mode first. OO10
enlargement/reduction)
6 T number is zero (0), or no tool is set.  Specify a T number. OO30
 Specify the PTLN command.
7 Specified T number or PTLN Specify a T number or PTON OO30
command is larger than the maximum command within the allowable range.
offset number.
8 The power to the probe is not on when Check the following: OO15
the flash on cycle is attempted.
 Is there any obstacle between the
receiver head and the probe?
 Is the spindle index angle for the
probe correct?
 Does the receiver head flash?
6130-E P-116
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
9 The offset amount of the positioning When positioning the Y- and Z-axes, OO30
point for cycle start from the touch position them within the range of
sensor zero point is greater than PCHK from the touch sensor zero
PCHK (only for Y- and Z-axes). point.
A The touch probe microcomputer stays Check whether chips are accumulating OO10
on. on the proximity switch.
B The result of the touch probe test is Check the touch probe battery.
NG.
The touch probe signal cannot be
confirmed.
C The touch probe contacts the With the FM type touch probe, OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at a reception of signals is not correct.
rapid approach feedrate (X-axis).
 Gauging cycle start point
 PUDT setting
D The touch probe fails to contact the When using the FM type touch probe, OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at a signal reception is not correct.
middle approach feedrate (X-axis).
 POVT setting
E The touch probe fails to contact the Check the touch probe battery. OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at the
final approach feedrate (X-axis).
When using the FM type touch probe,
signal reception is not correct.
F The proximity switch is not turned on Check if the touch probe has OO10
although the touch probe is brought chattered.
into contact with a workpiece (X-axis).
10 The touch probe contacts the Check the following: OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at a
rapid approach feedrate (Y-axis).
When using the FM type touch probe,  PUDT setting
11 The touch probe fails to contact the Check the following: OO10
middle approach feedrate (Y-axis).
When using the FM type touch probe,  POVT setting
12 The touch probe fails to contact the Check the touch probe battery. OO10
final approach feedrate (Y-axis). When
using the FM type touch probe, signal
reception is not correct.
13 The proximity switch is not turned on Check if the touch probe has OO10
into contact with a workpiece (Y-axis).
rapid approach feedrate (Z-axis).
6130-E P-117
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
middle approach feedrate (Z-axis).
final approach feedrate (Z-axis). When
into contact with a workpiece (Z-axis).
18 The touch probe contacts the Check the following items: OO10
workpiece during the approach to the
 Start point of the gauging cycle
external diameter in the OD gauging
cycle.  Assumed OD value
19 PLH is not designated. Set tool length offset number for PLH.
1A PDH is not designated. Set the cutter radius compensation
number for PDH.
1B In the C-axis gauging cycle, contact is Check the following items: OO10
detected during the approach to the
 Is start point of the C-axis gauging
gauging point.
cycle correct?
 Is PD1 value correct?
 Is PG1 value correct?
1C Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
X-axis direction motion within the
range of PUDT and POVT. (contact
value error)
1D Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
Y-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1E Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
Z-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1F In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
for the vertical spindle longitudinal close to the touch sensor
direction, the cutting tool fails to (within 10 mm (0.39 in.))?
contact the sensor.
20 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
for the vertical spindle radial direction, close to the touch sensor
the cutting tool fails to contact the (within 10 mm (0.39 in.))?
sensor.
21 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start position of the cycle; is OO30
for horizontal spindle longitudinal it close to the touch sensor
contact the sensor.
6130-E P-118
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
22 In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
automatic tool breakage detection close to the touch sensor
cycle for the horizontal spindle in the (within 10 mm (0.39 in.))?
radial direction, the cutting tool fails to
contact the sensor.
23 When the axis moves 0.5 mm (0.020 OO100
in.) in the positive direction from the
contact detect point, the probe contact
signal has already been on. (X
direction)
24 When the axis moves 0.5 mm (0.020
signal has already been on. (Y
direction)
signal has already been on. (Z
direction)
26 When the axis returns 0.5 mm (0.020
in.) from the contact position detected
after approach (X direction), the value
is taken as the coordinate value in the
workpiece gauging direction again.
after approach (Y direction), the value
after approach (Z direction), the value
29 In the automatic tool length offset/ Check if the anticipated tool length is OO30
automatic tool breakage detection correct. (for tool length offset cycle)
cycle for the vertical spindle in the
longitudinal direction, the cutting tools
fails to contact the sensor.
2A In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following: OO30
automatic tool breakage detection
 Is the expected tool diameter
cycle is performed in the vertical tool
correct (in the tool radius
compensation cycle)?
contact the sensor.
 Is the tool radius compensation
value set (in the tool breakage
detection cycle)?
6130-E P-119
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
2B In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
 Is the anticipated tool length
cycle for the horizontal spindle in the
correct? (for tool length offset
longitudinal direction, the cutting tool
cycle)
 Is the tool length offset data set?
(for tool breakage detection cycle)
2C In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
 Is the anticipated cutter radius
cycle)
contact the sensor.
 Is the cutter radius offset data set?
2D In the automatic tool length offset cycle Check if PLI is appropriate. OO30
in the X-axis direction (with angular
attachment), the cutting tool fails to
contact the sensor.
2E An attachment no. other than 51 and Delete PT or specify PT = 51 or PT = OO30
54 is specified to PT. 54.
2F The cover between the sensor and the Execute automatic door open (M32) OO30
table is not open. before execution of MSB.
30 During inclined surface machining Execute commands after cancelling
(G69). the G69 mode.
33 In the U-center zero setting cycle, the Check the following items:
cutting bit contacts the sensor, or the
 Is the sensor zero point set
contact signal is input, in a sequence
correctly?
in which the cutting bit should not
contact the sensor.  Is the cutting bit free of chips?
 Is the sensor signal correct?
34 In the U-center zero setting cycle, no Check the following items:
contact signal is input.
 Is PD value correct?
 Is the sensor signal correctly input
to the CNC?
35 In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check the following items:
the cutting bit contacts the touch
 Is the command value correct?
sensor while the Y-axis is being fed in
a sequence in which contact must not  Is the sensor signal correctly input
be detected. to the CNC?
 Is the cutting bit free of chips?
the cutting bit fails to contact the touch
 Is the U-axis command too large?
sensor.
to the CNC?
6130-E P-120
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
37 In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
the cutting bit fails to contact the touch input to the CNC.
sensor in the sequence in which the U-
axis adjusted amount is checked on
the Y-axis.
38 In the tool breakage detection cycle, Check the following items:
correctly?
a sequence in which contact must not
be detected.  Is the sensor signal correctly input
to the CNC?
39 In the tool wear compensation cycle, Check the following items:
sensor in a sequence in which the Y-
axis positioning is executed to a point  Is the U-center bit free of chips?
distanced from the current position by
the compensation amount.
to the CNC?
3A In the tool wear compensation cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
sensor in a sequence in which the
cutting bit radial position is corrected in
the U-axis adjusting cycle.
3B After the completion of U-axis Check if the sensor signal is correctly
compensation in the tool wear input to the CNC.
compensation cycle, the cutting bit
fails to contact the touch sensor in the
sequence in which the adjusted
amount is checked in the Y-axis
movement.
3C When the gauging cycle is executed Execute the gauging cycle after OO10
with a touch probe set in the vertical indexing the swivel head to the M75
spindle of the MCM, swivel head is not (rear) position.
in the M75 (rear) position.
3D In the touch sensor zero setting cycle  Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the vertical spindle in the the swivel head to the M73 (front)
longitudinal direction on the MCM, the position.
swivel head is not in the M73 (front)
position, or the horizontal spindle is
 Check if the PAXI data is correct.
being used.
3E In the touch sensor zero setting cycle  Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the vertical spindle in the radial the swivel head to the M73 (front)
direction on the MCM, the swivel head position.
is not in the M73 (front) position, or the
horizontal spindle is being used.
 Check if the PAXI data is correct
3F In the touch sensor zero setting cycle  Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the horizontal spindle in the the swivel head to the M76 (right)
swivel head is not in the M76 (right)
position, or the vertical spindle is being
used.
6130-E P-121
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
40 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle  Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the horizontal spindle in the MCM, the swivel head to the M76 (right)
the swivel head is not in the M76 position.
(right) position, or the vertical spindle
is being used.
41 The tool number for the angular Check if the T command is correct.
attachment is T52 or T53. (For the
angular attachment tool, only T51 (90°
angular attachment) can be used for
tool length offset).
42 The power supply for the optical type OO16
touch probe cannot be turned on. OO18
touch probe cannot be turned off. OO19
6130-E P-122
SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION
2-1. Overview
The automatic gauging function automatically checks the dimensions of a workpiece by executing a
subprogram. The touch probe with the same shank shape as the cutting tool is mounted in the
spindle and brought into contact with the gauging face of the workpiece to read the coordinate
values of the contact point. The workpiece dimension is then automatically calculated using these
coordinate values.
The results of gauging are displayed on the screen. It is also possible to judge if the gauging result is
acceptable or not in a part program.
It is possible to set the zero offset of any work coordinate system based on the results of gauging.
The automatic gauging function is classified into the following two major function types.
 Dimension check function
 Automatic zero offset function (includes the dimension check function)
2-1-1. Dimension Check Function

The following four gauging patterns are provided for the dimension check function.
(1) Inner diameter (ID) gauging

This function automatically measures the center position and the workpiece inner diameter.
The results can be evaluated.
(2) Outer diameter (OD) gauging

This function automatically measures the center position and the workpiece outer diameter.
(3) End face gauging

This function automatically measures the end face position in any of the following directions: X-
axis, Y-axis and Z-axis directions.
(4) Calculation of the center and distance between two points

This function calculates the center and the distance between two points measured in any of the
three patterns (1) to (3) described above.
Since the results obtained from the gauging cycle (gauging results) are automatically compared
with the theoretical values (anticipated values) and the difference calculated to judge whether or
not the gauging result is acceptable, this function can be used for the following purposes.
 Controlling the workpiece dimensions
 Recognizing the workpiece type (or pallet table)
 Confirming the zero point
2-1-2. Automatic Zero Offset Function

The automatic zero offset function offsets the zero point so that the coordinate values of the position
where the dimension check was executed will be the desired coordinate values.
In this way, zero offset is possible for any required work coordinate system.
6130-E P-123
2-2. Operation of the Automatic Gauging Function

The following flowchart shows the operating procedure of the automatic gauging function.
Automatic gauging function
Is the machine
model MCM?
Is the touch probe

mounted in the vertical
spindle?
2-2-1. Setting the Datum Ring

Zero Point
Execute these steps once a week to maintain the
accuracy of automatic gauging.
In addition to this compensation/offset at regular
Touch Probe Radius Touch Probe Radius intervals, you are recommended to execute these
Compensation Operation in Compensation Operation (MCM procedures when a new touch probe is set in the
2-2-2. Horizontal Spindle) in 2-2-2. magazine.
Zero point setting of the datum ring is necessary
only when a touch probe is mounted in the vertical
spindle (horizontal spindle for MC-H).
2-2-3. Touch Probe Length
Offset
Checking the workpiece Execute this function for controlling workpiece

dimension dimensions, judging workpiece kinds or offsetting
(2-2-4 to 2-2-9) the zero point automatically.
Is other gauging
performed?
Execute this function to automatically offset the

2-2-10. Automatic Zero Offset zero point according to the results of the dimension
Function check function.
End
ME61315R0300400040001
6130-E P-124
[Supplement]
The explanation in this section assumes that the functions are executed in the automatic mode.
Therefore, the programs necessary in each step of the operation must be prepared. Use the
program edit function to prepare these programs.
2-2-1. Setting the Datum Ring Zero Point

The datum ring zero point needs to be set when mounting the touch probe in the spindle. However,
this is only required when the touch probe is mounted in the Z-axis negative direction.
Procedure :
1 Mount a datum hole block (master ring) that has an accurately measured Φ20 mm (0.79 in.) or
larger diameter hole in it.
2 Accurately align the datum hole center with the spindle center using sling gauge or similar tool.
Use the pulse handle for this operation.
3 Set the zero point by the measurement with pulse handle.
4 Select the MDI mode and execute positioning to the zero point at a rapid feedrate. At the zero
point, check the measured value again.
5 Move only the Z-axis in the positive (+) direction to remove the sling gauge and mount the
touch probe in the spindle.
6 Move the Z-axis in the negative (-) direction to the position where the touch probe ball enters
the datum hole.
7 Move the Z-axis so that the touch probe ball enters the datum hole 5 to 7 mm (0.20 to 0.28 in.)
from the datum block upper face.
8 Select the MDI mode and execute the following program.

CALL OO21
M02
When this program is executed, the zero point is set so that the actual position of the touch
probe will be X=0, Y=0, Z=0 of system work coordinate system No. 3.
The result of setting can be confirmed by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up
window in the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The set X, Y and Z values are displayed at X, Y
and Z columns of the NO. 3 line.
6130-E P-125
ME61315R0300400050001
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 3 is used exclusively for the automatic gauging
function, it cannot normally be set or referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up window, refer to [MSB
ZERO ON/OFF Function Key] in 1-1-2 of SECTION 1.
6130-E P-126
2-2-2. Touch Probe Radius Compensation

The following describes how the touch probe radius is corrected.
To maintain high gauging accuracy, touch probe radius compensation must be executed at least
once a week.
Touch Probe Radius Compensation Operation
The general operating procedure for touch probe radius compensation is described below.
For touch probe radius compensation for the MCM horizontal spindle, refer to [Touch Probe Radius
Compensation Operation (MCM Horizontal Spindle)] in 2-2-2.
If the radius compensation cycle for the touch probe is executed before setting the zero point of
the datum hole, the machine will operate unpredictably.
Execute the touch probe radius compensation cycle only after setting the datum hole zero point.
Procedure :
1 Execute the datum hole zero point setting cycle.
2 Mount the touch probe in the spindle.
3 In the MDI mode, specify “VNCOM[1] = 8” and touch the probe by hand to check if the contact
detection signal is correctly turned ON and OFF.
The ON/OFF state of the contact detection signal can be checked by displaying the ACTUAL
POSITION screen or by observing the indicator lamps on the operation panel.
4 Select the automatic mode and execute the following program.

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=(Datum hole diameter) POVT=3
M02
The command must be specified in the presently selected unit system.
When the program is executed, the touch probe automatically enters the datum hole and the
radius compensation cycle is executed.
The results of the cycle are set for the tool radius compensation number indicated below.
Direction
System Variable Radius Compensation
Data
X+ VSTOD [1]
X- VSTOD [2]
Y+ VSTOD [3]
Y- VSTOD [4]
Z+ -
Z- VSTOD [5]
6130-E P-127
The set data can be checked by opening the MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB
CUTTER RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, shown below.
ME61315R0300400070001
For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTTER
RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, refer to [MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key] in 1-
1-2 of SECTION 1.
After making sure that the touch probe radius compensation data is set for the tool radius
compensation number, proceed to the steps below.
5 Using the hole where the touch probe radius compensation cycle has been executed, execute
the ID gauging cycle.
For the ID gauging cycle, refer to [2-2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function].
6 On the GAUGING RESULT display screen, compare the anticipated center value with the
measured center value to confirm that the difference is less than several micrometers.
7 Remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge instead.
8 Turn the sling gauge at the measured center position and compare the measured center value,
sling gauge reading and anticipated center value. Make sure that differences among these
three values are less than several micrometers.
This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation.
[Supplement]
Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively for the
automatic gauging function, they cannot normally be set or referenced.
6130-E P-128
Machine operation
During the execution of the touch probe radius compensation cycle, the touch probe moves as
indicated below.

Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch
probe signal.
For details, refer to [2-6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation].
(3) The X- and Y-axis move to the center of the datum hole at a rapid feedrate.
(4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate until the touch probe ball reaches a point 30 mm
(1.18 in.) away from the datum hole.
(5) The Z-axis moves down 30 mm (1.18 in.) further at a rapid feedrate and the touch probe ball
enters the datum hole.
(6) Datum hole gauging cycle is executed in the following sequence: X+ direction, X- direction, Y+
direction and Y- direction.
Touch Probe Radius Compensation Operation (MCM Horizontal Spindle)
The operating procedure for touch probe radius compensation is described below for the touch
probe mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle.
For general touch probe radius compensation, refer to [Touch Probe Radius Compensation
Operation] in 2-2-2.
Procedure :
1 Mount a datum hole block (master ring) that has an accurately measured Φ20 mm (0.79 in.) or
larger diameter hole in it.
2 Accurately align the datum hole center with the spindle center using sling gauge or similar tool.
Use the pulse handle for this operation.
3 Set the zero point by the measurement with pulse handle.

To do this, select the zero point setting mode and enter the data using the keyboard.
4 Select the MDI mode and execute positioning to the zero point at a rapid feedrate. At the zero
point, check the measured value again.
5 Move only the longitudinal axis in the positive (+) direction to remove the sling gauge, and
mount the touch probe in the spindle.
At this time, set the ACTUAL TOOL NO. as HORIZONTAL TOOL USED in the POT NO./TOOL
NO. TABLE in the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet in the TOOL DATA screen.
6 In the MDI mode, specify “VNCOM[1] = 8” and touch the probe by hand to check if the contact
detection signal is correctly turned ON and OFF.
The ON/OFF state of the contact detection signal can be checked by displaying the ACTUAL
POSITION screen or by observing the indicator lamps on the operation panel.
6130-E P-129
7 Move to the position where the touch probe ball enters the datum hole.
8 Move so that the touch probe ball enters the datum hole 5 to 7 mm (0.20 to 0.28 in.) from the
datum block upper face.

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=(Datum hole diameter) POVT=3
M02
The command must be specified in the presently selected unit system.
When the program is executed, the touch probe automatically enters the datum hole and the
radius compensation cycle is executed.
[Supplement]
To allow the CNC to automatically recognize the direction of the touch probe, the touch
probe must be mounted in the spindle in the automatic or MDI mode.
The results of the cycle are set for the tool radius compensation number indicated below.
Radius Direction
Compensation System Variable
Data M73 (Front) M74 (Left) M75 (Rear) M76 (Right)
X+ - VSTOD [9] VSTOH [3] VSTOD [17]
X- VSTOH [1] VSTOD [10] - VSTOD [18]
Y+ VSTOD [7] VSTOH [2] VSTOD [15] -
Y- VSTOD [8] - VSTOD [16] VSTOH [4]
Z+ VSTOD [5] VSTOD [11] VSTOD [13] VSTOD [19]
Z- VSTOD [6] VSTOD [12] VSTOD [14] VSTOD [20]
6130-E P-130
ME61315R0300400080001
RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, refer to [MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key] in 1-
1-2 of SECTION 1.
After making sure that the touch probe radius compensation data is set for the tool radius
compensation number, proceed to the steps below.
10 Using the hole where the touch probe radius compensation cycle has been executed, execute
the ID gauging cycle.
For the ID gauging cycle, refer to [2-2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function].
11 On the GAUGING RESULT display screen, compare the anticipated center value with the
measured center value to confirm that the difference is less than several micrometers.
12 Remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge instead.
13 Turn the sling gauge at the measured center position and compare the measured center value,
sling gauge reading and anticipated center value. Make sure that differences among these
three values are less than several micrometers.
This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation for the touch probe mounted in
the MCM horizontal spindle.
[Supplement]
Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively used for
the automatic gauging function, then cannot normally be set or referenced.
6130-E P-131
Machine operation
During the execution of the touch probe radius compensation cycle for the touch probe mounted in
the MCM horizontal spindle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.

probe signal.
(2) The gauging cycle is executed for the datum hole in the sequence indicated below.
Gauging Order
Touch Probe Direction
1 2 3 4
M73 (Front) Y+ Y- Z+ Z-
MCM M74 (Left) X+ X- Z+ Z-
Horizontal
spindle M75 (Rear) Y+ Y- Z+ Z-
M76 (Right) X+ X- Z+ Z-
(3) The Z-axis moves to and stops at the center of the datum hole.
6130-E P-132
2-2-3. Touch Probe Length Offset

The following describes how the touch probe length is offset.
To maintain high gauging accuracy, touch probe length offset must be executed at least once a
week.
Reference tool
PLI (Approximate length offset data of the touch

probe in reference to the reference tool)
PEI (Coordinate value of the Z-axis

Workpiece gauging face)
ME61315R0300400090001
The operating procedure for touch probe length offset is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the X-, Y- and Z-axis so that the touch probe comes to the end face where the gauging
cycle is to be executed.
For this positioning, use a part program (manual or MDI mode operation is also allowed).
The distance between the touch probe ball and the gauging face can be any desired distance.
CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=(Z-coordinate value of gauging face)

PLI=(Approximate touch probe length offset data)
M02
ME61315R0300400090002
When the program is executed, the length offset data of the touch probe is automatically
measured.
The offset data is calculated so that the result of the gauging cycle executed at the same
gauging face will be the value set for PEI and set for system length offset number 5.
For MCM, the offset data is set for system length offset numbers 1 to 5 as indicated below
Direction
No. MCM Horizontal Tool
Vertical Tool
M73 (Front) M74 (Left) M75 (Rear) M76 (Right)
Tool Length
VSTOH [5] VSTOH [1] VSTOH [2] VSTOH [3] VSTOH [4]
Offset No.
6130-E P-133
ME61315R0300400090003
This completes the touch probe length offset operation.
[Supplement]
Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 5 for the system are used exclusively for the
automatic gauging function, then cannot normally be set or referenced.
RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, refer to [MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key] in 1-1-2 of
SECTION 1.
Machine operation
During the execution of the touch probe length offset cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.

probe signal.
(2) The touch probe moves to the gauging face to measure the gauging face.
(3) The touch probe moves in the length direction and stops at the previous position.
The touch probe does not move in the radius direction for the execution of the touch probe
length offset cycle.
6130-E P-134
2-2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function

The ID gauging function automatically measures the center position and the diameter of the target
hole.
This function can evaluate the result of gauging at the same time.
The ID gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball at the anticipated center position of the target hole using a part
program.

CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=(Anticipated hole diameter)
M02
3 When this program is executed, the ID gauging cycle is automatically executed.

If a touch probe is mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle, the function automatically
recognizes the touch probe direction and executes the ID gauging cycle accordingly.
[Supplement]
To allow the CNC to automatically recognize the touch probe direction, the touch probe must
be mounted in the spindle in the automatic or MDI mode.
The results of gauging are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1-1.
Displaying the Result of Gauging].
ME61315R0300400100001
6130-E P-135
4 Retract the touch probe using a part program.

This completes the ID gauging operation.
Example program
G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z50 H1
M130
R100 GI Z-5 F1000
M131
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=200
G0 Z500
M02
H1: Touch probe tool length offset data
ME61315R0300400100002
Machine operation
During the execution of the ID gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.

probe signal.
(2) The function measures the hole ID by moving the touch probe in the following sequence of
directions: X+, X-, Y+, Y-, X+ and X-.
For the MCM, the order of axis movements depends on the touch probe direction as indicated
below. The touch probe stops at the center of the hole obtained as the result of the ID gauging
cycle.
Touch Probe Gauging Order
Direction 1 2 3 4 5 6
Vertical Spindle X+ X- Y+ Y- X+ X-
M73 Y+ Y- Z+ Z- Y+ Y-
(Front)
M74 X+ X- Z+ Z- X+ X-
MCM (Left)
Horizontal
spindle M75 Y+ Y- Z+ Z- Y+ Y-
(Rear)
M76 X+ X- Z+ Z- X+ X-
(Right)
(3) The touch probe stops at the center of the hole obtained as the result of the ID gauging cycle.
The touch probe lengthwise direction axis does not move during the execution of the ID
gauging cycle.
6130-E P-136
[Supplement]
1) When the PMSR command (PMSR=1) is specified, the gauging cycle takes place in the order
of 1 to 4 shown in the above table.
2) When the PMTR command (PMTR=1) is specified, the gauging cycle takes place in the order
3) When PMSR and PMTR commands are specified at the same time, the PMTR command
takes precedence.
4) Before starting gauging at three points with the PMTR command, bring the probe to the circle
center as close as possible in Y direction (Z direction for MCM Horizontal Machining Center).
If the probe position in Y direction is far from the circle center, even a distance of several
millimeters causes a gauging error of several to more than ten micrometers.
For the details of how to set the variables PMSR and PMTR, refer to in (10) PMSR (P
MEASURE) and (11) PMTR (P MEASURE THREE) in “How to Use Variables” on 2-5-5.
2-2-5. Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Function

The OD gauging function automatically measures the center position and the diameter of a
workpiece.
The OD gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball to the anticipated center position of the target outer diameter
using a part program.
In this positioning, move the touch probe ball to a point approximately 10 mm (0.39 in.) away
from the gauging point.

CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=(Anticipated outer diameter) *PIN=(Z direction feed distance)
M02
* PZIN may be used instead of PIN.
For argument PIN (PZIN), specify a relative value (a positive incremental value).
6130-E P-137
3 When the program is executed, the OD gauging cycle is automatically executed.

ME61315R0300400110001

This completes the OD gauging operation.
Example program
G0 X0 Y0
0
10
G56 Z10 H1
R
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=200 PZIN=15

G0 Z500
M02
Touch probe
PIN(PZIN)
In this program, positioning of the Z-axis is

executed at a rapid feedrate.
ME61315R0300400110002
6130-E P-138
Machine operation
During the execution of the OD gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.
Touch probe
a
PIN(PZIN) b
c Workpiece OD
ME61315R0300400110003

probe signal.
(2) The function measures the hole OD by moving the touch probe in the following sequence of
directions: X+, X-, Y+, Y-, X+ and X-.
For the MCM, the order of axis movements depends on the touch probe direction as indicated
below.
Touch Probe Gauging Order
Direction 1 2 3 4 5 6
Vertical Spindle X+ X- Y+ Y- X+ X-
M73 Y+ Y- Z+ Z- Y+ Y-
(Front)
M74 X+ X- Z+ Z- X+ X-
MCM (Left)
Horizontal
spindle M75 Y+ Y- Z+ Z- Y+ Y-
(Rear)
M76 X+ X- Z+ Z- X+ X-
(Right)
(3) The touch probe stops at the center obtained as the result of the OD gauging cycle.
[Supplement]
1) When the PMSR command (PMSR=1) is specified, the gauging cycle takes place in the order
2) When the PMTR command (PMTR=1) is specified, the gauging cycle takes place in the order
3) When PMSR and PMTR commands are specified at the same time, the PMTR command
takes precedence.
4) Before starting gauging at three points with the PMTR command, bring the probe to the circle
center as close as possible in Y direction (Z direction for MCM Horizontal Machining Center).
If the probe position in Y direction is far from the circle center, even a distance of several
millimeters causes a gauging error of several to more than ten micrometers.
For the details of how to set the variables PMSR and PMTR, refer to in (10) PMSR (P
MEASURE) and (11) PMTR (P MEASURE THREE) in “How to Use Variables” in 2-5-5.
6130-E P-139
2-2-6. End Face Gauging Cycle

The end face gauging cycle automatically measures the end face position in any of the following
directions: X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis directions.
X-axis End Face Gauging Operation
The X-axis end face gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball near the target X-axis end face using a part program.

CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=(Anticipated X-axis end face position)
M02
When the program is executed, the direction of X-axis movement is automatically determined
and the X-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed.
ME61315R0300400130001
6130-E P-140

This completes the X-axis end face gauging operation.
Example program
G0 X-120 Y0
100 G56 Z50 H1
Touch probe
M130
GI Z-5 F1000
M131
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=100
PEI G0 Z500
M02
ME61315R0300400130002
Machine operation
During the execution of the X-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.

probe signal.
(2) The X-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured.
(3) The X-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position.
Note that Y- and Z-axis do not move during the X-axis end face gauging cycle.
6130-E P-141
Y-axis End Face Gauging Operation
The Y-axis end face gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball near the target Y-axis end face using a part program.

CALL OO10 PMOD=2 PEI=(Anticipated Y-axis end face position)
M02
When the program is executed, the direction of Y-axis movement is automatically determined
and the Y-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed.
ME61315R0300400140001

This completes the Y-axis end face gauging operation.
6130-E P-142
Machine operation
During the execution of the Y-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.

probe signal.
(2) The Y-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured.
(3) The Y-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position.
Note that X- and Z-axis do not move during the Y-axis end face gauging cycle.
6130-E P-143
Z-axis End Face Gauging Operation
The Z-axis end face gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball near the target Z-axis end face using a part program.

CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=(Anticipated Z-axis end face position)
M02
When the program is executed, the direction of Z-axis movement is automatically determined
and the Z-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed.
ME61315R0300400150001

This completes the Z-axis end face gauging operation.
6130-E P-144
Machine operation
During the execution of the Z-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.

probe signal.
(2) The Z-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured.
(3) The Z-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position.
Note that X- and Y-axis do not move during the Z-axis end face gauging cycle.
6130-E P-145
2-2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results

The results obtained from the gauging cycle are stored in the CNC memory, and are updated to the
new results when the next gauging cycle is executed.
This data storage area where the data is updated every time a gauging cycle is executed is called A
memory.
The CNC memory also has an extra area in which all the results obtained from previous gauging
cycles are stored; it can be accessed as required. This data storage area is called B memory.
The procedure for transferring the contents in A memory to B memory is explained below.
Procedure :
1 Execute a gauging cycle for the first gauging point.

The result of the gauging cycle is stored to A memory.
2 Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. This is an example program
applicable when the gauging point is on an inner diameter.
CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=3
After the execution of the program, the data in A memory and that in B memory are swapped
and the data in A memory is saved in B memory.
Axes do not move even if the gauging result data is saved in B memory.
The setting for argument PAXI differs depending on the type of gauging cycle. See the table
below for this setting.
Gauging Cycle Type PAXI = Data Stored in A Memory

3 Center point of X- and Y-axis
Center point of X- and Z-axis
ID gauging 5
(Only for MCM horizontal spindle)
OD gauging
Center point of Y- and Z-axis
6
(Only for MCM horizontal spindle)
X-axis end face gauging 1 Gauging point on X-axis end face
Y-axis end face gauging 2 Gauging point on Y-axis end face
Z-axis end face gauging 4 Gauging point on Z-axis end face
3 Execute a gauging cycle for the next gauging point.

The result of the gauging cycle is stored to A memory. Since the previous result of gauging has
already been saved in B memory, it is not overwritten by the new result of gauging.
6130-E P-146
2-2-8. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two Points

The center-point/distance (between points) calculation function calculates the center point and the
distance between two points, stored in A memory and B memory.
The distance is calculated in the X- and Y-axis components, individually.
The operating procedure for measuring two points (point 1 and point 2) and calculating the center
and the distance between them is described below.
Procedure :
1 Execute a gauging cycle at point 1.

The results obtained from measurement of point 1 are stored in A memory.
After the execution of the program, the data in A memory is saved in B memory.
3 Execute a gauging cycle at point 2.

The results obtained from measurement of point 2 are stored in A memory.
For the setting for argument PAXI, refer to the table in 2-2-7.
When the program is executed, the center point and the distance between points 1 and 2 are
calculated and stored in A memory.
This completes the center-point/distance (between two points) calculating operation.
ME61315R0300400170001
6130-E P-147
[Supplement]
Axes do not move during the execution of the center-point/distance (between two points)
calculation function.
Example program
0
R10 G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z-5 H1
300 CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=3
300
Point 1 G0G56 Z10 H1
X300 Y-300
Center-point
between two Z-5
0
points R15 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=300
G0 Z500
M02
Point 2 H1: Touch probe tool length offset data
ME61315R0300400170002
6130-E P-148
2-2-9. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two End Faces
The center-point/distance (between end faces) calculation function calculates the center point and
the distance between two end faces (distance/center between inner faces, distance/center between
outer faces of a projection).
Touch Probe Movements during Gauging of the Distance between Two End
Faces
(1) Gauging the center-point/distance between inner faces
Skip feed
Rapid feed
ME61315R0300400190001
(2) Gauging the center-point/distance between outer faces of a projection
ME61315R0300400190002
6130-E P-149
Command Format of Center-point/Distance (between End Faces) Gauging

Program
(1) Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/distance between inner faces
CALL OO10 PMOD=** PELI=**

(PELE=**) (PCE=**) (PGO=*) (PUDT=**) (POVT=**) (VNUM=**)
PELI : Anticipated distance between two end faces
PCE : Permissible center error
PGO= 1: Touch probe does not stop on occurrence of excessive error alarm.
0: Touch probe stops on occurrence of excessive error alarm.
PMOD= 11: X direction
12: Y direction
13: Z direction
PELE : Permissible distance error
PUDT : Undertravel distance (safety clearance to the sensor)
POVT : Overtravel distance (sensor damage prevention distance)
VNUN : Gauging cycle number
PMOD and PELl must always be designated.
ME61315R0300400200001
Variables in ( ) should be designated as needed.
(2) Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/distance between projection outer faces
CALL OO10 PMOD=** PELI=** PIN=**

(PELE=**) (PCE=**) (PGO=*) (PUDT=**) (POVT=**) (VNUM=**)
PIN: Infeed direction feed distance
ME61315R0300400200002
Other variables: Same as in (1)

PMOD, PELI and PIN must always be designated.
Variables in ( ) should be designated as needed.
6130-E P-150
Gauging Result Display Screen
The results of center-point/distance (between end faces) gauging cycle are displayed on the
GAUGING RESULTS screen as shown below.
ME61315R0300400210001
a: EXPECTED CENTER POSITION

This indicates the positioning point at the start of the gauging cycle. Coordinate value is displayed
only for the gauging axis.
b: PERMISSIBLE ERROR (value set for PCE).
A value is displayed only when PCE is set.
c: MEASURED CENTER POSITION
Coordinate value is displayed only for the gauging axis.
d: EXPECTED DISTANCE (value set for PELI)
A value is displayed only when PELI is set.
e: PERMISSIBLE ERROR (value for PELE)
A value is displayed only when PELE is set.
f: MEASURED DISTANCE
Distance (axis component) is displayed only for the gauging axis.
g: Result of evaluation
“DECISION OK” is displayed if the results of gauging are acceptable. In other cases, alarm contents
are displayed.
6130-E P-151
2-2-10.Automatic Zero Offset Function

The automatic zero offset function automatically offsets the zero point so that the point measured by
the dimension check function will take the desired coordinate values.
Zero offset is possible for a desired work coordinate system.
Procedure :
1 Execute a dimension check cycle for the point that should be established as the zero point.
It is possible to set the center point obtained as the result of center-point/distance calculation
function as the zero point.

CALL OO20 PHN=(Work coordinate system No. where zero offset is executed)
PX=(Coordinate value of X gauging point after the execution of zero offset)
PY=(Coordinate value of Y gauging point after the execution of zero offset)
PZ=(Coordinate value of Z gauging point after the execution of zero offset)
[Supplement]
1) Specify only the axis (PX, PY or PZ) for which zero offset is required.
2) Do not designate axes in which dimension check cycle has not been executed.
3) Zero offset is not executed unless PHN is designated.
An alarm (ALARM-B 2308) occurs.
After the execution of the program, the zero point of the work coordinate system specified by
PHN is offset so that the coordinate values of the measured point will take the value set for
PX, PY and/or PZ. The zero point is not offset for the unspecified axes.
The results can be checked by displaying the ZERO OFFSET screen.
The axes do not move even when the automatic zero offset is executed.
4) Automatic zero offset is impossible if the CNC is reset after executing the dimension check
function. An alarm (ALARM-B 2310) occurs.
5) Execute the automatic zero offset function immediately after executing a gauging cycle (ID,
OD, end face) or a center-point/distance calculation cycle.
Example program (To set the ID center X=0, Y=0)
G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z-5 H1
300 CALL OO20 PHN=1 PX=0 PY=0
G0 Z500
M02
ME61315R0300400220001
6130-E P-152
2-2-11.Copying the Touch Probe Offset Data

The touch probe offset data copying function is valid only for the MCM.
This function allows the touch probe length offset/radius compensation data, measured in the
vertical spindle, to be used as the touch probe offset data for the horizontal spindle. This function is
suitable for operations that require simple operation rather than high accuracy
Procedure :
1 Measure the length offset data and radius compensation data of the touch probe by mounting it
in the vertical spindle.

CALL OO22
M02
After the execution of the program, touch probe offset data set for VSTOH[5] and VSTOD[1] to
[4] is set for VSTOH[1] to [4] and VSTOD[5] to [20], where the offset data is set for the
individual directions (M73, M74, M75 and M76) of the MCM.
The result of setting can be confirmed by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO*[N]) pop-up
window in the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
ME61315R0300400230001
[Supplement]
If touch probe offset data has already been set, the data is updated to the offset data
obtained using the touch probe mounted in the vertical spindle.
6130-E P-153
2-3. Automatic Gauging Function for B-/C-axis, 90° Angular

and Extension Attachments (Option)
This function executes automatic gauging of the vertical spindle attachment (also referred to as
attachment cover), 90° angular attachment, extension attachment, and B-/C-axis attachment while
mounted in the spindle.
(PAC = 90°)
(PAC = 180°)
(PAC = 0°)
Z+ (PAC = 270°)
Y+
X+
ME61315R0300400240001
Fig.2-1 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of 90° Angular Attachment
PAC = 90°
PAC = 180°
PAC = 0°
PAC = 270°
PAB
Z+
Y+
X+
ME61315R0300400240002
Fig.2-2 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of B-/C-axis Attachment

6130-E P-154
[Supplement]
1) PAB index angle should be PAB = 0° or PAB = 90°.

2) The relationships between the items on the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL
COMPENSATION screen and those on the ATTACHMENT SWlVEL COMPENSATION
screen are indicated below.
ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) ATTACHMENT SWlVEL

SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen COMPENSATION screen
Data for PAC=0 PAB=0 H* in the LOWER (G185) screen

Data for PAC=0 PAB=90 H* in the FRONT (G181) screen
Data for PAC=90 PAB=90 H* in the LEFT (G182) screen
Data for PAC=180 PAB=90 H* in the REAR (G183) screen
Data for PAC=270 PAB=90 H* in the RIGHT (G184) screen
ME61315R0300400240003
H*: Attachment compensation numbers H1 to H7

If two B-/C-axis attachments are used, set their data for the individual compensation numbers.
6130-E P-155
2-3-1. Automatic Gauging for 90° Angular Attachment and B-/C-axis

Attachment (PAB=90°)
The programs for executing the gauging functions are indicated below.
(1) Touch probe radius compensation

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=* PAT=* PAC=*
PDI: Datum hole diameter
(2) Touch probe length offset

CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=* PLI=* PAT=* PAC=*
PEI: Z coordinate value of gauging face
PLI: Approximate length of touch probe
(3) ID gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=* PAT=* PAC=*
PDI: Anticipated diameter of target hole
(4) OD gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=* PIN=* PAT=* PAC=*
PDI: Anticipated outer diameter
PIN: Z direction feed distance
(5) End face gauging (X-axis)

CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=* PAT=* PAC=*
PEI: Anticipated X-end face position
(6) End face gauging (Y-axis)

PEI: Anticipated Y-end face position
(7) End face gauging (Z-axis)

PEI: Anticipated Z-end face position
(8) Additional variables

PAT: Attachment swivel compensation No. (1 to 7)
PAC: Direction of 90° angular attachment, B-/C-axis attachment (0, 90, 180, 270)
[Supplement]
1) The gauging cycle is executed using the vertical spindle if PAT is not specified.
2) The value set for PAC is valid only when PAT is specified.
If PAC is not specified, “PAC=0” is assumed.
3) The PAC value must be set meeting the mounting angle of the 90° angular attachment or the
B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90°).
4) There are no other changes in the automatic gauging function.
6130-E P-156
2-3-2. Automatic Gauging for Extension Attachment and B-/C-axis

Attachment (PAB=0°)
The programs for executing the gauging functions are indicated below.
(1) Touch probe radius compensation

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=* PAT=* PAV=1
PDI: Datum hole diameter
(2) Touch probe length offset

CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=* PLI=* PAT=* PAV=1
PEI: Z coordinate value of gauging face
PLI: Approximate length of touch probe
(3) ID gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=* PAT=* PAV=1
PDI: Anticipated diameter of target hole
(4) OD gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=* PIN=* PAT=* PAV=1
PDI: Anticipated outer diameter
PIN: Z direction feed distance
(5) End face gauging (X-axis)

CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=* PAT=* PAV=1
PEI: Anticipated X-end face position
(6) End face gauging (Y-axis)

PEI: Anticipated Y-end face position
(7) End face gauging (Z-axis)

PEI: Anticipated Z-end face position
(8) Additional variables

PAT: Attachment swivel compensation No. (1 to 7)
PAV: Attachment type (1: Extension attachment / B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=0°), 0: 90° angular
attachment / B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90°))
[Supplement]
1) The gauging cycle is executed using the vertical spindle if PAT is not specified.
2) The value set for PAV is valid only when PAT is specified.
If PAV is not specified, “PAV = 0 (90° angular attachment/B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90°))” is
assumed.
3) When a gauging cycle is executed using the extension attachment or B-/C-axis attachment
(PAB=0°), always set “PAV = 1”.
4) There are no other changes in the automatic gauging function.
6130-E P-157
2-3-3. Automatic Gauging for MILLAC 800VH and MILLAC 1000VH

Tools can be gauged when they are in the horizontal or vertical position with MILLAC 800VH or
MILLAC 1000VH.
The following section covers automatic gauging for the tool in the horizontal position (A: -90 degree/
B: 90 degree). Automatic gauging for the tool in the vertical position (A: 0 degree/B: 0 degree) is
same as the vertical spindle. Refer to the subsection 2-2. Operation of the Automatic Gauging
Function.
Make sure to execute tool angle offset for automatic gauging for the tool in the horizontal position (A:
-90 degree/B: 90 degree) so that the tool is gauged after offset is compensated.
Gauging a tool with A-axis at - 90 degree for the machine with A and C-axis
ME61315R0300400280001
Specify PAT=1, PAC=270 for the gauging arguments.

The followings are the command for various gauging items.
(1) Gauging touch probe radius

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=* PAT=1 PAC=270
PDI: Diameter of datum hole
(2) Gauging touch probe length offset

CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=* PLI=* PAT=1 PAC=270
PEI: Coordinate value of surface to be gauged
PLI: Approximate tool length offset amount for the probe
(3) Gauging ID
PDI: Estimated diameter of hole to be gauged
6130-E P-158
(4) Gauging OD
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=* PIN=* PAT=1 PAC=270
PDI: Estimated diameter of OD to be gauged
PIN: Feed amount
(5) Gauging X end face

CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=* PAT=1 PAC=270
PEI: Estimated position of X end face
(6) Gauging Y end face

PEI: Estimated position of Y end face
(7) Gauging Z end face

PEI: Estimated position of Z end face
Gauging a tool with B-axis at 90 degree for the machine with B and C-axis
ME61315R0300400290001
Specify PAT=1, PAC=0 for the gauging arguments.

The followings are the command for various gauging items.
(1) Gauging touch probe radius

PDI: Diameter of datum hole
(2) Gauging touch probe length offset

CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=* PLI=* PAT=1 PAC=0
PEI: Coordinate value of surface to be gauged
PLI: Approximate tool length offset amount for the probe
6130-E P-159
(3) Gauging ID
PDI: Estimated diameter of hole to be gauged
(4) Gauging OD
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=* PIN=* PAT=1 PAC=0
PDI: Estimated diameter of OD to be gauged
PIN: Feed amount
(5) Gauging X end face

PEI: Estimated position of X end face
(6) Gauging Y end face

PEI: Estimated position of Y end face
(7) Gauging Z end face

PEI: Estimated position of Z end face
6130-E P-160
2-4. Power ON/OFF Cycle of the Touch Probe

This subsection describes the power ON/OFF cycle of the touch probe.
The power ON cycle commands are indicated below.
(1) MP7 (made by Renishaw)

CALL OO16

CALL OO16

CALL OO18 (PRS=*)
PRS:Specify the spindle index angle. If PRS is not specified, the spindle stops at the orientation
position.
(4) RMP60 (Renishaw radio transmission system)

CALL OO16 PSD=650
(5) The OMI-2T made by Renishaw or a touch probe made by Marposs

CALL OO83
The power OFF cycle commands are indicated below.

CALL OO17

Power is turned off in approximately 3 minutes after power OFF.

CALL OO19 (PRS=*)
PRS:Specify the spindle index angle. If PRS is not specified, the spindle stops at the orientation
position.
(4) RMP60 (Renishaw radio transmission system)

CALL OO17 PSD=650
(5) The OMI-2T made by Renishaw or a touch probe made by Marposs

CALL OO84
6130-E P-161
2-4-1. Power ON/OFF Cycle Operation
Power ON Cycle Operation
 OO16 [PSD=*] (MP7/MP9/RMP60)
Machine operation
a. At the present position, the spindle rotates at the speed specified with PSD. If no PSD
command is specified, the spindle rotates at 500 min-1.
Note that nothing happens if the power is already ON.
b. After a dwell for 1.5 seconds, the NC stops the spindle. After another dwell for 3 seconds,
the NC checks if the power is turned ON.
If the power is OFF, the NC waits until a dwell for 7 seconds ends and performs spindle
rotation and stop again. If the power is still OFF, the NC generates the following alarm and
stops the machine on the spot.
2305 ALARM-B UNTENDED: gauging impossible 42
c. This completes the power ON cycle.
 OO18 (MP10/OMP60/RMP60)
Machine operation
a. The spindle stops at the specified index position or orientation position, then an M code
(M127) is output internally.
b. After a dwell for 1.5 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned ON.
If the power is OFF, the NC waits for a dwell of 5 seconds and outputs the M code
command again for a dwell of 1.5 seconds. If the power is still OFF, the NC generates the
following alarm and stops the machine on the spot.
 OO83 (The OMI-2T or a touch probe made by Marposs)
Machine operation
b. After a dwell for 5 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned ON.
If the power is OFF, the NC waits for a dwell of 5 seconds and outputs the M code
command again for a dwell of 5 seconds. If the power is still OFF, the NC generates the
following alarm and stops the machine on the spot.

6130-E P-162
Power OFF Cycle Operation
 OO17 [PSD=*] (MP7/RMP60)
Machine operation
a. At the present position, the spindle rotates at the speed specified with PSD. If no PSD
command is specified, the spindle rotates at 500 min-1.
Note that nothing happens if the power is already OFF.
b. After a dwell for 1.5 seconds, the NC stops the spindle. After another dwell for 3 seconds,
the NC checks if the power is turned OFF.
If the power is ON, the NC waits until a dwell for 7 seconds ends and performs spindle
rotation and stop again. If the power is still ON, the NC generates the following alarm and
stops the machine on the spot.
c. This completes the power OFF cycle.
 OO19 (MP10/OMP60/RMP60)
Machine operation
b. After a dwell for 1.5 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned OFF.
If the power is ON, the NC waits for a dwell of 5 seconds and outputs the M code command
again for a dwell of 1.5 seconds. If the power is still ON, the NC generates the following
alarm and stops the machine on the spot.
 OO84 (The OMI-2T or a touch probe made by Marposs)
Machine operation
b. After a dwell for 5 seconds, the NC checks if the power is turned OFF.
If the power is ON, the NC waits for a dwell of 5 seconds and outputs the M code command
again for a dwell of 5 seconds. If the power is still ON, the NC generates the following
alarm and stops the machine on the spot.

6130-E P-163
[Supplement]
When subprogram OO16 or OO17 is executed, the spindle speed command (S command) value
is changed to the speed of PSD (or 500 min-1 if no command is given.) Therefore, the required
spindle speed must be specified to start the spindle after the execution of OO16 or OO17.
The value range for PSD command in OO16 and OO17 commands is same with that for spindle
speed command. Specify the PSD command for the rotation speed that may not damage the
touch probe.
6130-E P-164
2-5. Details
The foregoing subsections described the basic operating procedure for using the automatic gauging
functions.
This subsection gives detailed information on the automatic gauging functions.
2-5-1. Touch Probe Movements

Touch probe movements are described in detail below, taking gauging for an inner diameter as an
example.
(3)' (3)
(2)' (1)
(2) (1)'
(6)' (5)
(6) (5)' : Cutting feedrate

(4) (4)' : Rapid feedrate
ME61315R0300400340001
Touch probe movements in the ID gauging cycle consist of six passes (1) to (6), as shown in the
illustration above. Each of movements (1) to (6) may be regarded as a single gauging cycle on an
end face.
Therefore, touch probe movements are explained in detail for a single end face gauging cycle.
PUDT POVT
(1)
Position C
Position A (2)
Position B
(2)'
: Cutting feedrate
(3) : Rapid feedrate
(3)'
Anticipated end face position
ME61315R0300400340002
6130-E P-165
Machine operation
(1) The present position of the touch probe when subprogram OO10 is called is stored in the CNC
memory as position A.
(2) The position distanced from the anticipated position of the end face to be measured by the
amount set for PUDT is calculated.
This position is taken as position B. If PUDT is not set when subprogram OO10 is called, PUDT
is automatically set as 10 mm (0.39 in.).
(3) If position A is already closer to the anticipated position of the end face to be measured than
position B, then movement 4) is skipped and movement 5) is executed.
(4) The touch probe advances at a rapid approach speed to position B.

If the actual position differs excessively from the anticipated position of the end face to be
measured, the touch probe will come into contact with the end face to be measured during the
rapid approach movement. If this happens, the touch probe returns to position A at a rapid
feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect.
If the touch probe stops during its advance due to signal reception error (for FM type touch
probe), it returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and then advances toward position B once
again.
If it stops again during this second advance due to signal reception error, it returns to position A
at a rapid feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect.
(5) The function calculates the position beyond the anticipated position of the end face to be
measured by the amount set for POVT. This position is taken as position C.
If POVT is not set when subprogram OO10 is called, “POVT = 10 mm (0.39 in.)” is assumed.
(6) The touch probe advances at a rapid approach speed to position C.

When it comes into contact with the end face to be measured during this advance, it stops at
that position.
If the actual position differs excessively from the anticipated position of the end face to be
measured, the touch probe will fail to come into contact with the end face to be measured even
after it has reached position C. If this happens, the touch probe returns to position A at a rapid
feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect.
probe), it returns to position B at a rapid feedrate and then advances toward position C once
again.
(7) The touch probe returns at a rapid feedrate to a position 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) away from the
contact detected position.
(8) The touch probe advances at a slow approach speed to a position 1 mm (0.04 in.) beyond the
contact detected position on the end face.
If the touch probe comes into contact with the end face to be measured again while it is
advancing, it comes to a stop immediately.
probe), it returns to the position 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) away from the contact detected position at a
rapid feedrate. After that it advances toward the end face to be measured once again.
(9) The touch probe returns to position A at a rapid feedrate.

6130-E P-166
[Supplement]
1) The position where the touch probe came into contact with the end face to be measured is the
position where the limit switch inside the touch probe was activated. Therefore, the actual
position of the ball of the touch probe is 0.1 to 0.2 mm (0.004 to 0.008 in.) beyond the position
where it has come into contact with the end face to be measured.
2) When the gauging cycle has been completed, the touch probe comes to a stop at the center of
the hole on which measurement was carried out in the case of ID / OD gauging cycles.
3) For POVT and PUDT, set a value larger than 3 mm (0.12 in.).
6130-E P-167
2-5-2. Approach Speed to the Workpiece

The approach speed at which the touch probe moves toward a workpiece is described below.
Touch probe
(1)
(2) (3)
Workpiece
ME61315R0300400350001
(1) First approach speed

The first approach speed is the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves to the point
“safety clearance” away from the anticipated gauging point.
This feedrate is specified as PF1=** when calling a subroutine.
The feed override function is valid for this feedrate.
 Approach speed to the workpiece when PF1 is specified

X/Y direction: PF1 value
Z direction: 1/2 PF1 value
 Approach speed to the workpiece when PF1 is not specified

X/Y direction: F4000
Z direction: F2000
(2) Second approach speed

The second approach speed represents the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves from
the first approach point to the point where it comes into contact with the workpiece.
This feedrate is specified as PF2=** when calling a subroutine.
The feed override function is valid for this feedrate.
 Approach speed to the workpiece when PF2 is specified

X/Y/Z direction: PF2 value
 Approach speed to the workpiece when PF2 is not specified

X/Y/Z direction: F1000
6130-E P-168
(3) Third approach speed

The third approach speed is the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves from the point
0.5 mm (0.020 in.) away from the contact detected position to the position where the touch
probe comes into contact with the workpiece again.
This speed can be specified with PF=3** for calling a sub routine.
The override function is invalid for this speed.
- Approach speed to the workpiece when the PF3 command is issued
X-, Y-, or Z-axis direction: PF3 value
- Approach speed to the workpiece when no PF3 command is issued
X-, Y-, or Z-axis direction: F100
An example of OD gauging cycle (CALL O10 PMOD=6)
(1)
(8) (9)
G00
(16)
(7)
G31
(2) (6) (14) (15)
(10)
(5) (13)
(4) (12)
(3) (11)
ME61315R0300400350002
[Supplement]
When the PTCH command (PTCH=1) is issued, the probe touches the workpiece only once. In
this operation, the sensor performs only the first and the third approach by skipping the second
approach. To set the approach speed with the PTCH command, specify PF3=**.
Depending on the PUDT value (safety distance), designation of PTCH command may prolong the
gauging time. Note that the gauging accuracy decreases if the PF3 value is too large.
6130-E P-169
2-5-3. Dwell Time in Work Gauging

This subsection explains the dwell time used when the touch probe comes into contact with the
workpiece. The dwell occurs in the following three cases:
(1) At the 1st touch by the touch probe
(2) At 0.5-mm (0.020 in.) retraction of the touch probe after the 1st touch
(3) At the 2nd touch by the touch probe
These three times of dwells can be set with the command PDWL=** in calling a subroutine.
Touch probe
(2)
(1)
(3)
Workpiece
ME61315R0300400360001
The setting unit is second.

Without PDWL command, all the dwells are set to 0.5 second.
[Supplement]
The above three dwell times cannot be set independently.
2-5-4. Reducing Time before Movement of Touch Probe

There is a time lag after the sub program OO10 is called until the touch probe starts moving toward
the workpiece. (The time lag depends on the specifications, but usually 0.8 to 1.5 seconds.)
To reduce this time lag, specify PQIK=1 when calling a sub routine.
When specified, the time lag is reduced and the touch probe starts moving a little earlier.
[Supplement]
Note that there are following restrictions on use of PQIK=1.

 In manual interruption, X, Y, Z-axis shift amount (total) are all cancelled.
 The command is usable only when the probe direction is the same with the vertical spindle.
 The command is usable only for an FM type or optical probe.
 The variable unit setting (0.001 mm or 0.0001 inch) to be transferred to MSB becomes invalid.
(NC optional parameter bit No. 36, bit 0)
6130-E P-170
2-5-5. Variables Used in Subprograms

In this subsection, the variables necessary to make effective use of the automatic gauging functions
are described
Table of Subprograms and Variables
Variable
Variables for which
Subprogra Variables for which which
Set as Needed
be Used
Datum Hole Zero OO21 None VNUM: Gauging cycle None
Point Setting number
Touch Probe OO10 PMOD= 9 VNUM: Gauging cycle None
Radius PDI: Datum hole diameter number
Compensation PUDT: Undertravel distance
POVT: Overtravel distance
PTCH:
=1 Probe single touch
PQIK:
=1 Time reduction
before axis
movement
VNUM: Gauging cycle
number
PDWL: Dwell time
PF1: 1st approach speed
PF2: 2nd approach speed
PF3: 3rd approach speed
Touch Probe OO10 PMOD= 8 VNUM: Gauging cycle None
Length Offset PEI: Z-coordinate value number
of datum Z-end face PUDT: Undertravel distance
PLI: Approximate touch POVT: Overtravel distance
probe length offset PTCH:
data =1 Probe single touch
PQIK:
=1 Time reduction
before axis
movement
VNUM: Gauging cycle
number
PDWL: Dwell time
6130-E P-171
Variable
Variables for which
Set as Needed
be Used
Inner Diameter OO10 PMOD= 7 PDE: Permissible diameter None
Gauging PDI: Anticipated hole error
diameter PCE: Permissible ID
center position error
PGO:
=1 Does not cause
alarm stop on
occurrence of
excessive error
PUDT: Undertravel distance
PTCH:
PMSR:
=1 Second gauging not
executed
PMTR
=1 3-point gauging
PQIK
=1 Time reduction
before axis
movement
VNUM: Gauging cycle
number
PDWL: Dwell time
6130-E P-172
Variable
Variables for which
Set as Needed
be Used
Outer Diameter OO10 PMOD= 6 PDE: Permissible diameter None
Gauging PDI: Anticipated cylinder error
diameter PCE: Permissible OD
PIN: Infeed direction feed center position error
distance (PZIN) PGO:
=1 Does not cause
alarm stop on
occurrence of
excessive error
PTCH:
PMSR:
=1 Second gauging not
executed
PMTR
=1 3-point gauging
PQIK
=1 Time reduction
before axis
movement
VNUM: Gauging cycle
number
PDWL: Dwell time
End face gauging OO10 PMOD= 1 PEE: Permissible error of None
(X-axis) PEI: Anticipated X-end X-end face position
face position PGO:
=1 Does not cause
alarm stop on
occurrence
excessive error
PTCH:
PQIK
=1 Time reduction
before axis
movement
VNUM: Gauging cycle
number
PDWL: Dwell time
6130-E P-173
Variable
Variables for which
Set as Needed
be Used
(Y-axis) PEI: Anticipated Y-end Y-end face position
face position PGO:
=1 Does not cause
alarm stop on
occurrence of
excessive error
PTCH:
PQIK
=1 Time reduction
before axis
movement
VNUM: Gauging cycle
number
PDWL: Dwell time
(Z-axis) PEI: Anticipated Z-end Z-end face position
face position PGO:
=1 Does not cause
alarm stop on
occurrence of
excessive error
PTCH:
PQIK
=1 Time reduction
before axis
movement
VNUM: Gauging cycle
number
PDWL: Dwell time
6130-E P-174
Variable
Variables for which
Set as Needed
be Used
Gauging cycle for OO10 PMOD: PCE: Permissible center
calculating the =11 X direction error
center-point/ =12 Y direction PGO:
distance between =13 Z direction =1 Does not cause
inner faces PELI: Anticipated distance alarm stop on
between two end occurrence of
faces excessive error.
PELE: Permissible distance
error
PTCH:
PQIK
=1 Time reduction
before axis
movement
VNUM: Gauging cycle
number
PDWL: Dwell time
Gauging cycle for OO10 PMOD: PCE: Permissible center
calculating the =11 X direction error
center-point/ =12 Y direction PGO:
distance between =13 Z direction =1 Does not cause
outer faces PELI: Anticipated distance alarm stop on
between two end occurrence of
faces excessive error.
PIN: Movement in PELE: Permissible distance
longitudinal direction error
PTCH:
PQIK
=1 Time reduction
before axis
movement
VNUM: Gauging cycle
number
PDWL: Dwell time
6130-E P-175
Variable
Variables for which
Set as Needed
be Used
Saving the OO10 PMOD= 15
gauging result PAXI:
data =1 Saving the X-axis
data
=2 Saving the Y-axis
data
=3 Saving the X-/Y-axis
data
=4 Saving the Z-axis
data
=5 Saving the X-/Z-axis
data
=6 Saving the Y-/Z-axis
data
=7 Saving the X-/Y-/Z-
axis data
Gauging cycle for OO10 PMOD= 14 PE: Permissible error None
calculating the PAXI: PXCI: Anticipated center
center-point/ =1 Calculation on the position - X
distance between X-axis PXCE: Permissible center
two points =2 Calculation on the position error - X
Y-axis PXLI: Anticipated distance
=3 Calculation on the - X-X
X-/Y-axis PXLE: Permissible distance
=4 Calculation on the error - X-X
Z-axis PYCI: Anticipated center
=5 Calculation on the position - Y
X-/Z-axis PYCE: Permissible center
=6 Calculation on the position error - Y
Y-/Z-axis PYLI: Anticipated distance
=7 Calculation on the - Y-Y
X-/Y-/Z-axis PYLE: Permissible distance
error - Y-Y
PZCI: Anticipated center
position - Z
PZCE: Permissible center
position error - Z
PZLI: Anticipated distance
- Z-Z
PZLE: Permissible distance
error - Z-Z
PGO:
=1 Does not cause
alarm stop on
occurrence of
excessive error.
6130-E P-176
Variable
Variables for which
Set as Needed
be Used
Automatic zero OO20 PHN: Coordinate system None
offset number for which
zero point is offset
PX: X coordinate value
after zero offset
PY: Y coordinate value
after zero offset
PZ: Z coordinate value
after zero offset
How to Use Variables
(1) PMOD (P MODE)

Designates the automatic gauging mode.
PMOD Setting Gauging Mode
1 End face gauging cycle (X-axis)
2 End face gauging cycle (Y-axis)
3 End face gauging cycle (Z-axis)
6 OD gauging cycle
7 ID gauging cycle
8 Touch probe length offset
9 Touch probe radius compensation
Calculation of center and distance
14
between two points
15 Saving of the measurement results
(2) PDI (P DIAMETER IDEAL VALUE)

Sets the anticipated diameter in the ID/OD gauging cycles.
(3) PDE (P DIAMETER ERROR LIMIT)

Sets the permissible error of the diameter for the ID/OD gauging cycles as an absolute value.
The hole dia. error over alarm occurs if:
PDE < | PDl - (Actual measured value of the diameter) |
The value obtained from the measurement in the X-axis direction is used as the actual
measured value.
With the horizontal spindle of the MCM, the value measured in either the X- or Y- axis direction
is used as the actual measured value.
The measured diameter is not evaluated if PDE is not set. In this case, the result of judgment is
always OK.
(4) PCE (P CENTER ERROR LIMIT)

Sets the permissible error of the center position of a circle as an absolute value for ID/OD
gauging cycles.
The X-axis permissible error, the Y-axis permissible error and Z-axis permissible error cannot
be set individually.
The excessive off-center alarm occurs when,
PCE < | (Anticipated center of X-axis) - (Actual measured center of X-axis) |
PCE < | (Anticipated center of Y-axis) - (Actual measured center of Y-axis) |
6130-E P-177
PCE < | (anticipated center of Z-axis) - (actual measured center of Z-axis) | (for MCM horizontal
spindle)
The anticipated centers of the X-, Y- and Z-axis are the actual positions of the X-, Y- and Z-axis
when the ID/OD gauging subprograms are called during the execution of a part program.
Error in the measured center position is not evaluated if PCE is not set.
(5) PIN (P IN)/PZIN (P Z IN)

Sets the Z-axis direction infeed distance as a relative value (positive incremental amount) for
the OD gauging cycle
(6) PEI (P EDGE IDEAL VALUE)

Sets the end face position of the gauging target for the X-, Y- and Z-axis end face gauging
cycles and the touch probe length offset cycle.
(7) PEE (P EDGE ERROR LIMIT)

Sets the permissible error of the end face position for an end face gauging cycle.
The excessive off-center alarm occurs when,
PEE< | PEI - (Actual measured value of end face) |
Error in the measured end face position is not evaluated if PEE is not set.
(8) PUDT (P UNDER TRAVEL)

Sets the undertravel distance as an absolute value.
During the execution of a gauging cycle, the touch probe moves to a position a certain amount
away from the anticipated contact detection position at a fast feedrate. This amount is set using
PUDT.
If no value is set for PUDT, the undertravel distance is automatically set at 10 mm (0.39 in.).
The gauging impossible alarm occurs when the touch probe comes into contact with the
workpiece while it is advancing at a fast feedrate up to this position. If an occurrence of this
error is suspected, PUDT should be set. Usually, set a value larger than 3 mm (0.12 in.).
For the designation of PUDT, see examples 1 to 4.
(9) POVT (P OVER TRAVEL)

Sets the overtravel distance as absolute values.
During the execution of a gauging cycle, the touch probe moves to a position PUDT away from
the anticipated contact detection position at a fast feedrate. After this positioning, the touch
probe moves to a position a certain amount beyond the anticipated contact detection position at
a medium-fast feedrate. This amount is set using POVT.
If no value is set for POVT, the overtravel distance is automatically set at 10 mm (0.39 in.).
The gauging impossible alarm occurs when the touch probe fails to contact the workpiece even
on reaching the position determined by POVT. If an occurrence of this error is suspected, POVT
should be set.
For the designation of POVT, see examples 1 to 4.
Since the touch probe stops when it comes into contact with the workpiece, setting a large value
for POVT will generally not cause a problem. However, it could cause the touch probe unit to
strike the workpiece if a contact signal is not output due to the failure of the touch probe itself.
When an axis movement command larger than the touch probe stylus stroke is set, the touch
probe will be damaged if the contact signal is not output due to the failure of the touch probe itself.
Therefore, do not set an unnecessarily large value for POVT.
6130-E P-178
Example 1: PUDT and POVT not designated

If PUDT and POVT are not designated, 10 mm (0.39 in.) is automatically set as the
undertravel and overtravel distance.
Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40
Anticipated Actual
position position
X30 X40 X43 X50
Touch probe stops if contact

signal is not output.
PUDT=10 POVT=10
ME61315R0300400400001
Example 2: Only POVT designated

Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 POVT=2
X30 X35 X40 X42

PUDT=10 POVT=2
Set so that this distance is smaller than the
7mm (0.28 in.) allowable over-stroke of the touch probe.
ME61315R0300400400002
Example 3 Only PUDT designated (PUDT = 15)

Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 PUDT=15
X25 X30 X40 X50

PUDT=15 POVT=10
ME61315R0300400400003
6130-E P-179
[Supplement]
Determine the PUDT value taking into consideration the allowable over-stroke of the touch probe.
Example 4: Both POVT and PUDT designated (POVT = 5, PUDT = 15)

Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 POVT=5
X25 X35 X40 X45

PUDT=15 POVT=5
ME61315R0300400400004
(10) PMSR (P MEASURE)

Usually, contact detection is executed two times in the X-axis direction when an ID/OD gauging
cycle is executed. If “PMSR = 1” is set, however, the second contact detection cycle is not
executed.
When the touch probe is set in the horizontal spindle of MCM, the second contact detection
cycle in the X or Y-axis direction is not executed.
(11) PMTR (P MEASURE THREE)

When PMTR=1 is specified in ID or OD gauging cycle, the system measures the diameter only
by gauging at X+, X-, and Y+ points. (For MCM Horizontal Machining Center, the system
measures the diameter only by gauging at Y+, Y-, Z+ points or X+, X-, Z+ points.)
Although the gauging time with the PMTR command is shorter that with the PMSR command,
there is a little tendency to cause a gauging error.
(12) PTCH (P TOUCH)

Usually the touch probe touches the workpiece twice (second approach and third approach). If
PTCH=1 is specified, however, the probe touches the workpiece only once (third approach) to
measure the diameter. To set the approach speed for this gauging, specify PF3=**.
[Supplement]
Depending on the PUDT value, designation of PTCH command may prolong the gauging time.
Note that the gauging accuracy decreases if the PF3 value is too large.
(13) PQIK (P QUICK)

There is a time lag after the sub program OO10 is called until the touch probe starts moving
toward the workpiece. This time lag can be a little reduced by specifying PQIK=1.
6130-E P-180
[Supplement]
Note that there are following restrictions on use of PQIK=1.

 In manual interruption, X, Y, Z-axis shift amount (total) are all cancelled.
 The command is usable only when the probe direction is the same with the vertical spindle.
 The command is usable only for an FM type or optical probe.
 The variable unit setting (0.001 mm or 0.0001 inch) to be transferred to MSB becomes invalid.
(NC optional parameter bit No. 36, bit 0)
(14) PDWL (P DWELL)

Set the dwell time in seconds used when the touch probe comes into contact with the
workpiece.
The dwell is needed in the following three cases:
- At the 1st touch by the touch probe
- At 0.5-mm (0.020 in.) retraction of the touch probe after the 1st touch
- At the 2nd touch by the touch probe
These three times of dwells can be set with the command PDWL=** in calling a subroutine.
Without PDWL command, all the dwells are set to 0.5 second.
[Supplement]
The above three dwell times cannot be set independently.
(15) PGO (P GO)
 When “PGO = 1” is set, an alarm does not occur if the results obtained from the gauging
cycle exceed the permissible range. When “PGO = 1” is set, judge the results of gauging
(OK/NG) in a part program by reading system variable VOK1 after the completion of an
automatic gauging subprogram.
“VOK1 = 0” when the result is OK.
 Another system variable, VOK2, is also used for storing the result of the gauging cycle.
Differing from system variable VOK1, which holds the result of the dimension check cycle
executed immediately before its designation, VOK2 indicates, if “VOK2 ≠ 0”, an occurrence
that the result of any one of dimension check cycles has exceeded the permissible error in
all of the dimension check cycles executed after VOK2 has been reset to 0 (VOK2 = 0).
 In the case of the gauging impossible alarm, zero offset impossible alarm, command
missing error alarm or no subprogram function alarm, the CNC is alarm-stopped even if
“PGO = 1” is set.
When PGO is not set, the CNC is alarm-stopped when the gauging cycle results have
exceeded the permissible error also.
6130-E P-181
Program example with "PGO = 1" setting

.
.
N24 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=80 PDE=0.05 PGO=1.......... ID gauging
N25 IF [VOK1 EQ 0] N29 ........................................................ Jumps to N29 if the result is OK.
N26 IF [VC930 GT 80000] N100.............................................. Jumps to N100 if the diameter is
greater than φ80.05 mm (3.1516 in.).
N27 M0
N28 GOTO N18 ....................................................................... Re-machining
N29 M6
N30 T10
N31 G0 X140 Y0
.
.
ME61315R0300400400005
With the program above, the diameter of the hole finished by boring operation is measured
(N24). If the hole diameter is within a specified range (Φ79.95 to Φ80.05 mm (3.1476 to
3.1516 in.)), the machining cycle is continued. If the diameter is larger than Φ80.05 mm
(3.1516 in.), the workpiece is determined defective and the machining cycle is halted.
If the diameter is smaller than Φ79.95 mm (3.1476 in.), execution of the program is
interrupted by the M0 command in N27. This allows the operator to adjust the boring bit, to
carry out the boring cycle on the same hole again.
(16) VNUM (V NUM BER)

Sets the gauging cycle number (range: 0 to 9999).
Before the execution of an ID/OD gauging cycle, touch probe length offset, or touch probe
radius compensation cycle, the present VNUM value is increased by “1” and the new number is
printed as the gauging cycle number
Once designated, VNUM is automatically increased by “1” at each execution of a gauging cycle
to be printed.
When the gauging cycle number increases one by one and reaches 10000, the counter is reset
and “0” is printed. Then, the number increases one by one from “0” in the same way as
explained above.
(17) PAXI (P AXIS)

Sets the target axes for saving the gauging cycle results or for calculating the center and
distance between two points.
PAXI Setting Target Axes
1 X-axis
2 Y-axis
3 X- and Y-axis
4 Z-axis
5 X- and Z-axis
6 Y- and Z-axis
7 X-, Y- and Z-axis
(18) PHN (P H NUMBER)

Sets the work coordinate system number for which zero offset is executed using the automatic
zero offset function.
When PHN is not set, this results in a command missing alarm.
6130-E P-182
(19) PX, PY, PZ

These variables set the coordinate values that the actual position should take after offsetting of
the zero point by the automatic zero offset function.
Set the coordinate value only for the axes on which zero offset is required.
For the undesignated axes, the zero offset data remains unchanged.
Example: The procedure for offsetting the zero point of work coordinate system No. 2 so
that the center of an inner diameter will have the coordinate values X = 10, Y = 50
is described below.
- Execute the ID gauging cycle.

- Execute the following program.
CALL OO20 PHN=2 PX=10 PY=50
(20) PXCI (P X CENTER IDEAL VALUE)/PYCI (P Y CENTER IDEAL VALUE)

/PZCI (P Z CENTER IDEAL VALUE)
These variables set the anticipated values of the center between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in
the calculation of the center/distance between two points.
When these values are not set, the center position obtained as the result of a gauging cycle
result is not evaluated.
(21) PXCE (P X CENTER ERROR LIMIT)/PYCE (P Y CENTER ERROR LIMIT)

/PZCE (P Z CENTER ERROR LIMIT)
These variables set the permissible errors in the position of the center between two points (X-X,
Y-Y, Z-Z) in the calculation of the center/distance between two points. Designate absolute
values.
When these values are not set, the center position obtained as the result of a gauging cycle is
not evaluated.
(22) PXLI (P X LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)/PYLI (P Y LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)

/PZLI (P Z LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)
These variables set the anticipated distances between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in the
calculation of the center/distance between two points.
When these values are not set, the distance between two points obtained as the results of a
gauging cycle result is not evaluated.
(23) PXLE (P X LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)/PYLE (P Y LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)

/PZLE (P Z LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)
These variables set the permissible errors in the distances between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in
the calculation of the center/distance between two points. Designate absolute values.
When these values are not set, the distance between two points obtained as the results of a
gauging cycle result is not evaluated.
(24) PE (P ERROR)
For the designation of the cycle to calculate the center/distance between two points, if the same
value is assigned to permissible error values of the center position and the distance, variable
PE can replace the designation of PXCE, PYCE, PZCE, PXLE, PYLE and PZLE.
The following two programs have the same effect.
PXCE=0.01 PYCE=0.01 PZCE=0.01 PXLE=0.01 PYLE=0.01 PZLE=0.01
PE=0.01
Note that PE is given priority over PXCE, PYCE, PZCE, PXLE, PYLE and PZLE. Therefore,
take care when using PE with other variables.
If the setting is, for example, as indicated below
PE=0.01 PZCE=0.02 PZLE=0.03
it is the same as
PE=0.01 PZCE=0.01 PZLE=0.01
6130-E P-183
(25) PELI (P EDGE LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)

Sets the anticipated distance between two faces.
(26) PELE (P EDGE LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)

Sets the permissible error between the distance set for PELI and the actual measured value.
Common Variables for Storing Gauging Cycle Results
After the execution of an automatic gauging cycle, the obtained results can be checked by
displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen. In addition to this check, the results can be used in a
part program to control program flow and other processing since they are stored in the common
variables indicated below.
Type of
Type of Gauging Common Common Common
Type of Gauging Cycle Gauging
Cycle Variable Variable Variable
Cycle
End face
ID gauging: Center (X) VS29 Data saving: X-axis data VS26 gauging: X- VS29
axis data
End face
ID gauging: Center (Y) VS28 Data saving: Y-axis data VS25 gauging: Y- VS28
axis data
End face
ID gauging: ID VS30 Data saving: Z-axis data VS24 gauging: Z- VS27
axis data
Center between two
OD gauging: Center (X) VS29 VS29
points (X)
Center between two

OD gauging: Center (Y) VS28 VS28 — —
points (Y)
Center between two

OD gauging: OD VS30 VS27
points (Z)
Note that referencing of the common variables indicated above is not allowed in the usual common
variable reference method. To use the data stored in these common variables, move it to other
common variables that can be referenced.
To reference the end face gauging result in the X-axis direction, move the data to VC1, for example,
by specifying “VC1 = VS29”, then read common variable VC1 in a part program.
[Supplement]
When the CNC is reset or the operation mode is changed to manual after the execution of a
gauging cycle, the data obtained in this gauging cycle is cleared. In this case, it is necessary to
execute the gauging cycle again.
6130-E P-184
2-6. Touch Probe Safety Measures
2-6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation

The touch probe signal is transmitted by the proximity switch. However, when chips adhere to the
proximity switch, the touch probe signal may not be transmitted.
To check if the proximity switch is operating correctly, the following sequence is executed when an
automatic gauging cycle is executed.
Machine operation
(1) The touch probe signal is checked when an automatic gauging cycle subprogram OO10 is
called.
(2) If the signal is not output, the Z-axis moves to the travel end in the positive (+) direction and the
spindle starts rotating to remove chips.
(3) If the output of the signal is not confirmed even after the check above is repeated several times,
the operation is stopped by the gauging impossible alarm.
If the output of the signal is confirmed, the axes move to the gauging cycle start point at a rapid
feedrate.
[Supplement]
1) When the touch probe is set in the spindle manually, carry out this operation to confirm that
the signal is transmitted even if the proximity switch seems to be functioning correctly.
2) When the touch probe is set in the spindle manually, always orient the spindle before calling
an automatic gauging cycle subprogram.
3) With the FM type touch probe, operations of the proximity switch are not checked.
6130-E P-185
2-6-2. Replacing the Touch Probe Battery

The FM type touch probe has a battery incorporated in its body.
If a gauging cycle is executed while the battery voltage is low, the touch probe fails to function
normally and the gauging cycle impossible alarm occurs.
(1) Checking the Battery

Press the battery ON switch halfway with the touch probe detached from the spindle.
The low battery voltage indicating LED should light in this condition.
If it is not lit, replace the battery.
If the low battery voltage indicating LED is blinking while the touch probe is set in the spindle,
replace the battery soon.
(2) Replacing the Battery

To replace the battery, follow the procedure indicated below. Take care not to bend the antenna
and battery holder while replacing the battery.
Battery and holder

Cover
Battery ON switch Cover clamp nut
Stylus
Transmission antenna Low battery voltage

indicating LED
There are two types of battery ON switch.
ME61315R0300400430001
Procedure :
1 Remove the cover clamp nut and the cover.

The battery incorporated in the touch probe body will be exposed.
2 Remove the battery from the battery holder.
3 Disconnect the battery connector and replace the battery with a new one.
[Supplement]
1) Battery type: Type OO6P (9 V, 2 pcs.)

2) Battery life: Approx. 40 hours in continuous use
3) You are recommended to remove the battery from the touch probe unit and store it properly
when the touch probe is not used.
6130-E P-186
2-7. Supplementary Information

Supplementary information relating to the automatic gauging function is given below. Before using
this function, make sure you fully understand the information below.
(1) All commands for programs are given in units of 1 mm (0.04 in.) or 0.001 mm (0.00004 in.).
Commands should be given in the unit presently selected.
Commands cannot be given in units of 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.).
(2) Cutter radius compensation mode cancel command (G40) is executed in an automatic gauging
cycle subprogram.
Note that S commands may be changed due to the execution of an automatic gauging cycle
subprogram.
(3) Do not call an automatic gauging cycle subprogram while a shift amount in a manual
intervention operation remains.
If an automatic gauging cycle subprogram is called in this state, the gauging impossible alarm
occurs.
(4) The work coordinate system cannot be changed during the execution of an automatic gauging
cycle subprogram.
(5) The user area for tape storage length, number of work coordinate sets, number of tool offset
sets, and common variables is not used in execution of an automatic gauging cycle
subprogram.
(6) Do not execute an automatic gauging/automatic zero offset cycle while using a local coordinate
system or the graphics enlarge/reduction mode.
(7) The permissible nesting level of subroutines during the execution of an automatic gauging
subprogram is two.
Accordingly, nesting of the maximum of six levels is possible only when the automatic gauging
function is called.
(8) Do not call an automatic gauging subprogram in the machine coordinate system (H0).
(9) As with other tools, you are recommended to set the same number as the touch probe tool
number for VSTOH[5] as the tool offset number. This facilitates program and other checking
since the touch probe length offset data can be checked in the same way as for other tools.
(10) When setting a value for POVT, the restrictions indicated below apply. When a 100% feed
override is set, the feedrate is F1000.
Example
1st Approach Speed (Feed Override Setting) Min. POVT Setting
F1000 (100%) 2 mm (0.08 in.)
F1500 (150%) 3 mm (0.12 in.)
F2000 (200%) 4 mm (0.16 in.)
[Supplement]
The minimum value of POVT varies within a range of 2 to 5 mm (0.08 to 0.20 in.) depending on
the servo characteristics.
(11) The diameter of holes or bosses to be measured must be larger than Φ20 mm (0.79 in.).
6130-E P-187
(12) With MCM series machining centers, index the swivel head to the rear position (M75) when
setting the touch probe in the vertical spindle.
If the touch probe is set in the vertical spindle with the swivel head at a position other than the
rear position, an alarm occurs (UNTENDED: gauging impossible 3C).
Note that the automatic or MDI mode must be selected when mounting the touch probe in the
vertical spindle.
(13) With MCM series machining centers, never execute the zero point setting cycle (OO21) for the
datum hole with the horizontal spindle.
(14) The direction of touch probe mounting in the spindle is determined by the machine model.
Therefore, pay attention to the direction when manually mounting the touch probe in the
spindle.
(15) To check the touch probe function, follow the steps indicated below.
a. After entering “VNCOM[1] = 8” in the MDI mode, press the CYCLE START button.
b. Manually move the touch probe right and left.
c. The characters “touch probe” on the screen (position display screen) are highlighted if the
touch probe is operating correctly.
The data at VNCOM[1] is reset to “0” when the CNC is reset or the operation mode is
changed to manual.
In this state, the displayed characters do not change even when the touch probe is moved.
If the touch probe is manually set in the horizontal spindle of an MCM series machining center to
execute the touch probe radius compensation cycle, always set the horizontal spindle tool
command on the TOOL DATA SET screen.
Otherwise, the Z-axis will move and the touch probe will be broken.
6130-E P-188
2-8. Program Examples

Examples of programs for using the automatic gauging function are described below.
These examples may be used for reference when making your own programs.
2-8-1. ID Gauging
.
.
N36 T1......................................................................................... (T1: Touch probe)
N37 M6
N38 T17
N39 G0 X250 Y190..................................................................... Positioning at approximate center
of the hole to be measured
N40 G56 Z-10 H1....................................................................... Inserting the touch probe ball into
the hole
(H1: Tool offset number of the touch
probe)
N41 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=50 (PDE=0.1 PCE=0.05)........ (PDI: Anticipated ID)
(PDE: Permissible ID error)
(PCE: Permissible center position
error)
.
.
Executes the ID gauging cycle
.
.
N42 G0 Z300.............................................................................. After the completion of the gauging
cycle, the touch probe ball remains
in the hole. Move the touch probe in
the Z+ direction.
.
.
ME61315R0300400460001
(X,Y)=250.190 Touch probe
PDI=50
ME61315R0300400460002
Variables PDE and PCE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If they are not specified, however, the errors are not evaluated.
6130-E P-189
2-8-2. OD Gauging
.
.
N62 T1......................................................................... (T1: Touch probe)
N63 M6
N64 T12
N65 G0 X310 Y210 ..................................................... Positioning at approximate center of the
OD to be measured
N66 G56 Z40 H1.......................................................... Positioning of Z-axis at a point 10 to
several tens of mm above the gauging
point (see the illustration below.)
N67 CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=50 PZIN=30
(PDE=0.1 PCE=0.05)............ Executing the OD gauging cycle
(PDI: Anticipated OD)
(PZIN: Z-direction infeed amount)
(PDE: Permissible OD error)
(PCE: Permissible center position error)
.
.
ME61315R0300400470001
Positioning point before

start of gauging cycle
Positioning of Z-axis at
the gauging level
Workpiece to
be measured
Touch probe
PZIN = 30 mm (1.18 in.)
PDI = 50 mm (1.97 in.) For PZIN, set the distance (Z-axis) from the positioning
point level to the gauging level.
ME61315R0300400470002
Variables PDE and PCE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If they are not specified, however, the errors are not evaluated.
After the completion of the gauging cycle, the touch probe stops at the center of the measured OD
(Z-axis retracts to the positioning point).
6130-E P-190
2-8-3. End Face Gauging on Z-axis
.
.
N95 T1.............................................................................. (T1: Touch probe)
N96 M6
N97 T4
N98 G0 X-25 Y60 Positioning at a point 10 to several tens mm away from the Z-end
N99 G56 Z80 H1 face to be measured
N100 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=35 (PEE=0.1).............. (PEI: Anticipated end face position)
(PEE: Permissible error)
N101 G0 Z300
.
.
ME61315R0300400480001
Position the touch probe ball at

a point 10 to several tens of mm
away from the target end face.
After the completion of the gauging

cycle, the touch probe returns to the
point where the first positioning was
completed.
PEI =
35 mm (1.38 in.)
ME61315R0300400480002
Variable PEE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If this variable is not specified, however, the error is not evaluated.
6130-E P-191
2-8-4. Distance between End Faces (X-axis direction)
.
.
N242 G0 X-20 Y60 Positioning at a point 10 to several tens of mm away from one
N243 G56 Z-10 H1 of the target end faces (end face A)
N244 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=0 ........................... End face gauging cycle on end face A
N245 CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=1......................... Storing the result of gauging in B
memory
N246 G0 Z300
N247 X90 Positioning at a point 10 to several tens of mm away from the other
N248 G56 Z-10 H1 target end face (end face B)
N249 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=70 .......................... End face gauging cycle on end face B
N250 CALL OO10 PMOD=14 PAXI=1
(PXCI=35 PXCE=0.05 PXLI=70 PXLE=0.05)............ Distance calculation cycle
(PXCI: Anticipated center position)
(PXCE: Permissible center position
error)
(PXLI: Anticipated distance between
end faces)
(PXLE: Permissible error of distance
between end faces)
N251 G0 Z300
.
.
N250 CALL OO10 PMOD=14...................................... No axis moves during the execution of
the distance calculation cycle
ME61315R0300400490001
End face A End face B
PXCI = 35
10 to Several 10 to Several
tens of mm PXCI = 70 tens of mm
Program zero
ME61315R0300400490002
Variables specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If they are not specified, however, errors are not evaluated.
When measuring the center and the distance between two points, the commands to store the first
gauging data in B memory are necessary (Example: N245 CALL OO10 PMOD=15).
6130-E P-192
If these commands are not specified, the result of the first gauging cycle is overwritten by the result
of the next gauging cycle.
For details on how to save the gauging result data refer to [2-2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results].
2-8-5. Automatic Zero Offset
.
.
N412 G0 X40 Y50
N413 G56 Z-40 H1
N414 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=45 (PCE=0.03 PDE=0.05).. ID gauging cycle
N415 CALL OO20 PHN=5 PX=0 PY=0.................................... For coordinate system No. 5, the
zero point (X = 0, Y = 0) is
established at the hole center
obtained by executing the ID
gauging cycle.
(PHN: Coordinate system No.)
N416 G0 Z300
N417 X60 Y60
N418 G56 Z-20 H1
N419 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=-30 (PEE=0.05)................... End face gauging cycle on Z- axis
N420 CALL OO20 PHN=5 PZ=0.............................................. For the coordinate system No. 5,
the zero point (Z = 0) is
established at the end face
position obtained by executing
the end face gauging cycle
(Z-axis).
N421 G0 Z300
ME61315R0300400500001
The zero point of coordinate system

No. 5 is set at the hole center and the
end face (face A).
Face A
30
Program zero
ME61315R0300400500002
On execution of sequences N415 and N420, no axis moves.

Execute the automatic zero offset cycle immediately after the execution of a gauging cycle (ID/OD
gauging cycle, end face gauging cycle, center/distance between two points/pitch calculation cycle).
Since an alarm occurs and zero offset is not executed if PHN is not set, always set it.
6130-E P-193
2-8-6. Example Program for MCM Horizontal Spindle
φ100 (3.94) 4-M20
2-10
DRILL
φ75 (2.95) 4-M6

Z X
Y
ME61315R0300400510001
6130-E P-194
.
.
N1 G15 H1......................................................... Selecting work coordinate system No. 1
N2 G0 X-500 Y800 G56 H1
N3 T1................................................................. T1: Touch probe
N4 M6
N5 T10 .............................................................. T10: φ17.5 (0.689 in.) drill
N6 G0 X0 Y0...................................................... Moving the X- and Y-axis to the anticipated
center of the φ100 mm (3.94 in.) hole
N7 Z-5 H1.......................................................... Moving the touch probe ball into the hole
(H1: Touch probe length offset data)
N8 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=100 POVT=3.... ID gauging cycle at φ100 mm (3.94 in.) hole
(PDI: Anticipated hole diameter)
(POVT: Overtravel distance)
N9 CALL OO20 PX=0 PY=0 PHN=1................. Zero offset according to the gauging results
(PX: X coordinate value after zero offset)
(PY: Y coordinate value after zero offset)
(PHN: Coordinate system No.)
N10 G0 Z100
N11 X75
N12 G56 Z30 H1............................................... Positioning of the Z-axis near the end face
(Z-axis)
N13 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=0 POVT=3..... End face gauging cycle (Z-axis)
(PEI: Anticipated end face position)
N14 CALL OO20 PZ=0 PHN=1......................... Zero offset according to the gauging results
(PZ: Z coordinate value after zero offset)
N15 G0 Z400
N16 X500 Y800
N17 M6
N18 T11............................................................. T11: H20 tap
N19 NCYL G81 G56 R5 Z-58 F90 S450 H10.... Part program for machining at the workpiece
upper face
ME61315R0300400510002
6130-E P-195
.
.
N49 G0 Z400
N50 X500 Y800
N51 M67
N52 M77
N53 T15
N54 G0 Y0 M75 ................................................ M75: Indexing the swivel head to the rear
position
N55 G54 X-500 H1
N56 Z-170 ........................................................ Moving the Y- and Z-axis to the anticipated
center of the φ75 mm (2.95 in.) hole
N57 X-270 ........................................................ Moving the touch probe ball into the hole
N58 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=75.................. ID gauging cycle at φ75 mm (2.95 in.) hole
N59 CALL OO20 PY=0 PZ=0 PHN=2 .............. Zero offset according to the gauging results
N60 G0 X-400
N61 Y60
N62 G54 X-300 H1............................................ Positioning of the X-axis near the end face
(X-axis)
N63 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=-280 .............. End face gauging cycle (X-axis)
N64 CALL OO20 PX=0 PHN=2 ....................... Zero offset according to the gauging results
N65 G0 X-400
.
.
Normal part program
.
.
ME61315R0300400510003
6130-E P-196
2-9. Examples of Gauging Result Display

(1) Result of ID gauging
ME61315R0300400520001
(2) Result of OD gauging
ME61315R0300400520002
6130-E P-197
(3) Result of end face gauging (X-axis)
ME61315R0300400520003
(4) Result of end face gauging (Y-axis)
ME61315R0300400520004
6130-E P-198
(5) Result of end face gauging (Z-axis)
ME61315R0300400520005
(6) Result of calculation of the center/distance between two points
ME61315R0300400520006
6130-E P-199
2-10. Alarm
2-10-1.Alarm List

ALARM-B 2305 At the end of the gauging impossible Refer to the Gauging Impossible
UNTENDED: message, the cause code is Cause Code Chart and eliminate the
gauging displayed. cause.
impossible
"ALARM-B 2305
UNTENDED:
gauging impossible ××"
↑
Cause code
ME61315R0300400530001
ALARM-B 2311 Although there is no automatic zero —

UNTENDED: offset specification, an attempt was
no subprogram made to call the automatic zero offset
function subprogram.
ALARM-B 2308 An undefined number was set for Check the value set at PMOD.
UNTENDED: variable PMOD.
command There is no PDI setting for ID/OD For the ID/OD gauging cycle, set an
missing gauging cycle, or for touch probe anticipated diameter for PDI. For the
radius compensation cycle. touch probe radius compensation
cycle, set an accurate ID for PDI.
There is no PHN setting in automatic Set the work coordinate system
zero offset commands. number for which zero offset is to be
executed for PHN.
There is no PEI setting for the end For the end face gauging cycle, set
face gauging cycle (X, Y or Z), or for an anticipated end face position for
the touch probe length offset cycle. PEl. For the touch probe tool length
offset cycle, set accurate Z end face
position data for PEI.
ALARM-B 2306 The difference between the —
UNTENDED: anticipated diameter and the actual
hole dia. diameter obtained as the result of ID/
error over OD gauging cycle has exceeded the
permissible error (PDE).
UNTENDED: anticipated center position and the
off centerline actual center position obtained as the
result of the ID/OD gauging cycle has
exceeded the permissible error
(PCE).
The difference between the —
anticipated end face position and the
actual end face position obtained as
the result of the end face gauging
cycle (X, Y, Z) has exceeded the
permissible error (PEE).
6130-E P-200

UNTENDED: anticipated value (center position and
center distance distance between two points) and the
error over actual value obtained as the results
of the gauging and calculation cycle
has exceeded the permissible error.
ALARM-B 2310 Since the results of the dimension —
UNTENDED: check executed immediately before
zero offset the automatic zero offset function
impossible were NG, zero offsetting is
impossible.
Automatic zero offset is executed Automatic zero offset is possible only
although a dimension check is not after a dimension check has been
executed. executed.
Automatic zero offset is executed If the RESET button is pressed after
after pressing the RESET button executing the dimension check, the
following the execution of a results of the gauging cycle are
dimension check. cleared and thus the automatic zero
offset is impossible. In this case, the
dimension check must be executed
again.
ALARM-D 4223 The battery incorporated in the touch Replace the battery.
Touch probe probe has expired. The life expiration
battery signal is turned on.
<I/O bit>
I/O monitor Addr. 0016 Bit0:
ON: Abnormal
OFF: Normal
The input bit position varies
according to the machine model. For
the bit position, refer to the wiring
diagram.
6130-E P-201
2-10-2.Gauging Impossible Cause Code Chart (Alarm B 2305)
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
1 A maker subprogram is called while Call a maker subprogram after OO10
the machine coordinate system (H0) is selecting a work coordinate system OO30
selected (G15 H1, for example).
2 The mirror image function is active. Cancel the mirror image function first. OO10
OO30
3 Manual shift amount (total) remains. Cancel the manual shift amount (total) OO10
to zero. OO30
4 In the G11 mode (parallel or rotation Cancel the G11 mode first. OO10
shift of a coordinate)
5 In the G51 mode Cancel the G51 mode first. OO10
(graphics enlargement/reduction)
6 T number is zero (0), or no tool is set.  Specify a T number. OO30
 Specify the PTLN command.
7 Specified T number or PTLN Specify a T number or PTLN command OO30
command is larger than the maximum within the allowable range.
offset number.
8 The power to the probe is not on when Check the following: OO15
the flash on cycle is attempted.
 Is there any obstacle between the
receiver head and the probe?
 Is the spindle index angle for the
probe correct?
 Does the receiver head flash?
9 The offset amount of the positioning When positioning the Y and Z axes, OO30
point for cycle start from the touch position them within the range of
sensor zero point is greater than PCHK from the touch sensor zero
PCHK point.
(only for Y and Z axes).
A The touch probe microcomputer stays Check whether chips are accumulating OO10
on. on the proximity switch.
B The result of the touch probe test is Check the touch probe battery.
NG.
The touch probe signal cannot be
confirmed.
C The touch probe contacts the With the FM type touch probe, OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at a reception of signals is not correct.
rapid approach feedrate (X-axis).
 PUDT setting
D The touch probe fails to contact the When using the FM type touch probe, OO10
workpiece while it is being fed at a signal reception is not correct.
middle approach feedrate (X-axis).
 POVT setting
6130-E P-202
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
E The touch probe fails to contact the Check the touch probe battery. OO10
final approach feedrate (X-axis).
When using the FM type touch probe,
F The proximity switch is not turned on Check if the touch probe has OO10
rapid approach feedrate (Y-axis).
middle approach feedrate (Y-axis).
final approach feedrate (Y-axis). When
rapid approach feedrate (Z-axis).
middle approach feedrate (Z-axis).
final approach feedrate (Z-axis). When
into contact with a workpiece (Z-axis).
18 The touch probe contacts the Check the following items: OO10
workpiece during the approach to the
 Start point of the gauging cycle
external diameter in the OD gauging
cycle.  Assumed OD value
19 PLH is not designated. Set tool length offset number for PLH.
1A PDH is not designated. Set the cutter radius compensation
number for PDH.
6130-E P-203
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
1B In the C-axis gauging cycle, contact is Check the following items: OO10
detected during the approach to the
 Is start point of the C-axis gauging
gauging point.
cycle correct?
 Is PDl value correct?
 Is PGI value correct?
1C Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
X-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1D Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
Y-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1E Touch probe contact is not detected in OO100
Z-axis direction motion within the
value error)
1F In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
for the vertical spindle longitudinal close to the touch sensor
contact the sensor.
20 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
for the vertical spindle radial direction, close to the touch sensor
the cutting tool fails to contact the (within 10 mm (0.39 in.))?
sensor.
21 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start position of the cycle; is OO30
for horizontal spindle longitudinal it close to the touch sensor
contact the sensor.
22 In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the start point of the cycle; is it OO30
automatic tool breakage detection close to the touch sensor
cycle for the horizontal spindle in the (within 10 mm (0.39 in.))?
contact the sensor.
23 When the axis moves 0.5 mm (0.020 OO100
signal has already been on. (X
direction)
signal has already been on. (Y
direction)
signal has already been on. (Z
direction)
6130-E P-204
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
after approach (X direction), the value
after approach (Y direction), the value
after approach (Z direction), the value
29 In the automatic tool length offset/ Check if the anticipated tool length is OO30
automatic tool breakage detection correct. (for tool length offset cycle)
longitudinal direction, the cutting tools
2A In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
radial direction, the cutting tools fails to
cycle)
contact the sensor.
2B In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
longitudinal direction, the cutting tool
cycle)
 Is the tool length offset data set?
2C In the automatic tool length offset/ Check the following items: OO30
 Is the anticipated cutter radius
cycle)
contact the sensor.
2D In the automatic tool length offset cycle Check if PLI is appropriate. OO30
in the X-axis direction (with angular
attachment), the cutting tool fails to
contact the sensor.
2E An attachment no. other than 51 and Delete PT or specify PT = 51 or PT = OO30
54 is specified to PT. 54.
2F The cover between the sensor and the Execute automatic door open (M32) OO30
table is not open. before execution of MSB.
30 During inclined surface machining Execute commands after cancelling
(G69). the G69 mode (G68).
6130-E P-205
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
33 In the U-center zero setting cycle, the Check the following items:
cutting bit contacts the sensor, or the
contact signal is input, in a sequence
correctly?
in which the cutting bit should not
contact the sensor.  Is the cutting bit free of chips?
 Is the sensor signal correct?
34 In the U-center zero setting cycle, no Check the following items:
contact signal is input.
 Is PD value correct?
to the CNC?
a sequence in which contact must not  Is the sensor signal correctly input
be detected. to the CNC?
the cutting bit fails to contact the touch
 Is the U-axis command too large?
sensor.
to the CNC?
37 In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
sensor in the sequence in which the U-
axis adjusted amount is checked on
the Y-axis.
38 In the tool breakage detection cycle, Check the following items:
correctly?
a sequence in which contact must not
be detected.  Is the sensor signal correctly input
to the CNC?
39 In the tool wear compensation cycle, Check the following items:
sensor in a sequence in which the Y-
axis positioning is executed to a point  Is the U-center bit free of chips?
distanced from the current position by
the compensation amount.
to the CNC?
3A In the tool wear compensation cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
sensor in a sequence in which the
cutting bit radial position is corrected in
the U-axis adjusting cycle.
6130-E P-206
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
3B After the completion of U-axis Check if the sensor signal is correctly
compensation in the tool wear input to the CNC.
compensation cycle, the cutting bit
fails to contact the touch sensor in the
sequence in which the adjusted
amount is checked in the Y-axis
movement.
3C When the gauging cycle is executed Execute the gauging cycle after OO10
with a touch probe set in the vertical indexing the swivel head to the M75
spindle of the MCM, swivel head is not (rear) position.
in the M75 (rear) position.
3D In the touch sensor zero setting cycle  Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the vertical spindle in the the swivel head to the M73 (front)
swivel head is not in the M73 (front)
position, or the horizontal spindle is
being used.
3E In the touch sensor zero setting cycle  Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the vertical spindle in the radial the swivel head to the M73 (front)
direction on the MCM, the swivel head position.
is not in the M73 (front) position, or the
horizontal spindle is being used.
3F In the touch sensor zero setting cycle  Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the horizontal spindle in the the swivel head to the M76 (right)
swivel head is not in the M76 (right)
position, or the vertical spindle is being
used.
40 In the touch sensor zero setting cycle  Execute the cycle after indexing OO30
for the horizontal spindle in the MCM, the swivel head to the M76 (right)
the swivel head is not in the M76 position.
(right) position, or the vertical spindle
is being used.
41 The tool number for the angular Check if the T command is correct.
attachment is T52 or T53. (For the
angular attachment tool, only T51 (90°
angular attachment) can be used for
tool length offset).
touch probe cannot be turned on. OO18
touch probe cannot be turned off. OO19
44 In the inner gauging cycle in the X-axis OO10
direction, the horizontal spindle is
being used with the swivel head facing
to the right or left.
45 In the inner gauging cycle in the Y-axis OO10
direction, the horizontal spindle is
being used with the swivel head facing
to the right or left.
6130-E P-207
Code Used
(HEX) Subprograms
46 In the inner gauging cycle in the Z-axis OO10
direction, the vertical spindle is being
used.
4E While the touch probe with FM system OO100
is approaching at a rapid approach
rate in the X-axis direction, the signal
reception failure has occurred.
4F While the touch probe with FM system OO100
is approaching at a middle approach
rate in the X-axis direction, the signal
50 While the touch probe with FM system OO100
is approaching for the final approach in
the X-axis direction, the signal
rate in the Y-axis direction, the signal
rate in the Y-axis direction, the signal
the Y-axis direction, the signal
rate in the Z-axis direction, the signal
rate in the Z-axis direction, the signal
the Z-axis direction, the signal
58 PLI (spare tool length), VMTL (optional OO30
parameter long word No43), POVT
(over travel distance)
59 PH (actual tool no.), VMTL (optional OO30
parameter long word No43), POVT
(over travel distance)
6130-E P-208
SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE
3-1. Outline
The print statement has been used to output the data and character strings of the variables to the
panel CRT.
In addition to these output operations, this function allows output of the variables data to a file
(MD1:A.MDF).
3-2. Parameters
3-2-1. NC Optional Parameter Bit
No. bit Description
16 3 If a print command is issued while the file is accessed in

Alarm C Alarm D
the program operation mode or MD1: does not have
“3237” “4262”
enough free area, an alarm C will occur.
32 5 The print function outputs data to a file (A.MDF)
regardless of the variable data (VPRT) for designating Does Does not
the displaying device.
3-3. Designation of Displaying Device

The displaying device designation signal is output with a variable VPRT as shown in the table below.
Unit of variables data

Output device Minimum unit Standard unit
system system
Not output VPRT = 0 VPRT = 4
Output to the panel CRT VPRT = 2 VPRT = 6
Output to the panel CRT VPRT = 3 VPRT = 7
Output to a file VPRT = 8 VPRT = 12
Output to a file VPRT = 9 VPRT = 13
Output to the panel CRT and a file VPRT = 10 VPRT = 14
Output to the panel CRT and a file VPRT = 11 VPRT = 15
Note 1 : If a checkmark is set at the checkbox of the NC optional parameter (bit) No. 32 bit 5,
data is output to the file (MD1:A.MDF), regardless of the variable (VPRT) for designating
the displaying device.
Note 2 : The gauging data obtained by execution of an MSB is not output to a file even when the
relevant value is set at the variable VPRT.
It is output only when a checkmark is set at the NC optional parameter (bit) No.32, bit 5.
Note 3 : For the output in minimum unit system or standard unit system, refer to the explanation
about the print command of the floating-point variable described in 3-4-1, *2.
6130-E P-209
3-4. Print Command

The value or the character string of the specified variable is output to the panel CRT or a file
according to the variable (VPRT) for designating the displaying device.
If a variable or a character string is omitted, only a line is fed. The area used to display the variable
data and character string are already divided and allocated to each system variable used. If a space
is used as a delimiter, the variable data or character string is displayed immediately after the
previously printed data without line feed.
Command format 1) PRINT [<Expression> ---]
2) LPRINT [<Expression> ---]
3) SPRINT [<Expression> ---]
Sample statement PRINT “ABC”

When the command 1) is specified, the specified variable data and the character strings are
displayed with normal characters. When the command 2) is specified, they are displayed with
enlarged characters. When the command 3) is specified, they are displayed with normal characters
without line feed.
Note 1: Even if the LPRINT command (enlarged display) is given, characters are not displayed
enlarged on the CRT panel or in an output file but are displayed in the normal size.
3-4-1. System Variables for Printing
<Expression> Range Output example

VINTG -99999999 to 99999999 “ -99999999”
Integer type variable [12 digits]
[Sample statement] PRINT VINTG
VNUM -999 to 999 “NO. 9”
[Sample statement] PRINT VNUM [7 digits]
VOK1 0 to 5, 10 to 15 Normal chars (Enlarged chars)
[Sample statement] PRINT VOK1 “ ” VOK1=0 (VOK1=10)
“ OK” VOK1=1 (VOK1=11)
“+OK” VOK1=2 (VOK1=12)
“+NG” VOK1=3 (VOK1=13)
“-NG” VOK1=4 (VOK1=14)
“ NG” VOK1=5 (VOK1=15)
[3 digits]
VOK2 1, 2 “TOTAL OK” VOK2=1
[Sample statement] PRINT VOK2 “TOTAL NG” VOK2=2
[8 digits]
VC**, VPRT -99999999 to 999999999 In millimeters
Floating-point variable (Max 8 digits) “ -99999.999”
[Sample statement] PRINT VC1 In inches
“ -9999.9999”
[12 digits]
“--------” Max number of characters: 80 “ABC”
Character string
[Sample statement] PRINT “ABC”
#----H Max number of characters: 4 “aiue”
Characters displayed in hexadecimal
[Sample statement] PRINT #B1B2B3B4H
6130-E P-210
*1 : If the variable is EMPTY, a blank “ ” is output.

*2 : For the floating-point variable, the displayed data varies depending on whether the
minimum unit system is selected or the standard one is selected for the VPRT that
designates the displaying device (see item 3-3. Designation of Displaying Device).
Unit Description of floating-point variable Output example

Standard unit system Metric VC**=12.34 12.340
VPRT=4 to 7 Inch VC**=12.34 12.3400
Minimum unit system Metric VC**=12.34 0.012
VPRT=0 to 3 Inch VC**=12.34 0.0012
* When a checkmark is set at the checkbox of the NC optional parameter bit No. 3, bit 0, the
inch unit system is selected. If not, metric is selected.
The data, which can be displayed in minimum unit system, may exceed 8 digits if
converted into the standard unit system. In that case, the following indication appears:
“ +OVER FLOW” or “ -OVER FLOW”
*3 : Only the following codes are output to a file (MD1:A.MDF):

space ! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) _* + , - . / 0 to 9 : ; < = > ? @ A to Z [ \ ] a to z { | }
The other codes are replaced with “?”.
6130-E P-211
SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING
4-1. Overview
4-1-1. Specifications
In the manual gauging function, the zero point and tool offset values are set by using the touch
probe or the touch sensor.
In the manual gauging function, the operator carries out the operation in the manual mode by using
the display screen in an interactive style, unlike the automatic gauging or automatic tool length offset
function. Thus the operator does not have to learn to how to create the program special for gauging.
Since this function can be used to set the data easily and readily without referring to the program
explanation manual, it is recommended to use this function for the following cases.
 Setting the zero or the tool length offset data for machining a one of a kind workpiece.
 Setting the zero or the tool length offset data for machining the first workpiece, and beginning
production from the next workpiece using the set data.
 Setting the zero or the tool length offset data for machining another workpiece by interrupting
operation during the repeating lot production using the same part program.
4-1-2. Outline of manual gauging function

The outlines of each manual gauging function are described as follows.
[Supplement]
Since the manual gauging function is used in the manual operation mode, all manual operations
including rapid traverse, cutting feed, feed by the pulse handle are enabled during gauging.
Therefore, move the axis using rapid traverse to the position close to the target position, and then
switch the operation to the pulse handle operation to bring the axis into contact with the touch
probe and touch sensor.
6130-E P-212
Gauging preparation function
The gauging preparation function is used to prepare gauging of a workpiece and a tool. Locate the
cursor to the gauging diagram in the WK SETUP sheet in the operation screen, select [F4]
(PREPARE MEAS.), and execute each preparation function in the following order.
1. Reference plane setting

2. Touch probe length offset
3. Reference ring center
4. Touch probe radius compensation
[Supplement]
1) Perform the tool length offset and the tool radius compensation with the touch probe
accordingly as appropriate after performed once.
2) Make sure to perform the tool length offset and the tool radius compensation with the touch
probe after the filler was changed or the filler collided.
3) To perform gauging with high accuracy, reduce runout of the touch probe.
6130-E P-213
Workpiece gauging function
The workpiece gauging function is used to perform gauging the length, hole diameter, and center
coordinate of a workpiece and to perform zero offset by using the touch probe.
Use the function by selecting a suitable pattern from the following gauging patterns according to the
shape of the workpiece.
(1) Angle
(2) End face
(3) Corner (right angle, free angle)
(4) Circle (ID, OD)
(5) Center between end faces (of inner and outer end)
(6) Level difference
(7) Angle and center between two circles
(8) Center between three circles
(9) Intersection point and center between four circles
ME61315R0300600050001
[Supplement]
Before performing workpiece gauging, perform gauging preparation by referring to "4-2-1.

Preparation for workpiece gauging".
6130-E P-214
Tool length gauging function
The tool length gauging function is used to gauge the tool length by using the touch sensor and
perform tool length offset according to the result.
In this function, the tool of which length from the reference tool or gauge line to the tool edge is
known is used as a gauge.
ME61315R0300600060001
Perform the tool length offset in either of the following methods.
 Relative offset method

The length difference from the tool used as a gauge is applied as the tool length offset value.
Reference tool
Register L as a tool length offset value.

ME61315R0300600060002
 Absolute offset method

The length from the gauge line to the tool edge of the tool is applied as the tool length offset
value.
Gauge line

ME61315R0300600060003
6130-E P-215
[Supplement]
Before performing tool length gauging, perform gauging preparation by referring to "4-2-2.
Preparation for tool length gauging".
Tool radius gauging function
The tool radius gauging function is used to gauge the tool radius by using the touch sensor
sideways, and perform tool radius compensation according to the result.
The tool with which reference tool or radius is known is used as a gauge.
ME61315R0300600330001
[Supplement]

Preparation for tool radius gauging".
6130-E P-216
4-2. Preparation for Gauging

The preparation for workpiece gauging and tool gauging is explained below.
Perform gauging preparation by following the procedures below before using each gauging function.
4-2-1. Preparation for workpiece gauging
Procedure :
1 Prepare the touch probe, reference block, reference ring, and sling gauge.
2 Attach the reference block to the table.
3 Select the manual mode by pressing the "manual" operation mode key, and display the
operation screen by pressing the "operation screen" key.
4 Select the WK SETUP sheet and locate the cursor to the WORK ZERO table.
ME61315R0300600100001
5 Press the [F6] (WORK GAUGING).
6 Mount the reference tool to the spindle by [F2] (OPERATE TOOL).

For the detail of the manual tool operation, refer to “2-2-4 in SECTION 2” in the operation
manual - data operation-.
6130-E P-217
7 Press the [F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT) to set the window title to "MANUAL". Then, press the
[F4] (PREPARE MEAS.).
ME61315R0300600100002
8 Bring the reference tool into contact with the reference block by operating the pulse handle. Set
the feedrate at "x 1" immediately before contacting with the sensor.
At this point, perform zero offset to put the reference plane position into the memory.
Zero offset for the system No.22 (REF FACE NO.S 22) is the one for registration of reference
plane positions and not used in regular programs.
9 Check that the cursor is located at REF. SURFACE SET (REF FACE NO.S 22 X, Y) and press
the WRITE key. The zero offset value is set so that the contact position (X, Y) becomes “0”.
10 Check that the cursor is located at REF. SURFACE SET (REF FACE NO.S 22 Z). Set the Z
position in the reference plane by following the message shown in the bottom of the screen.
 When setting the touch probe length offset by relative offset:

Set the thickness of the reference block and press the WRITE key.
 When setting the touch probe length offset by absolute offset:

Set the sum of the reference block thickness and the reference tool length and press the
WRITE key.
11 Move the reference tool away from the reference block by using the pulse handle.
12 Press the [F8] (CLOSE). Mount the touch probe to the spindle by [F2] (OPERATE TOOL).
13 Press the [F4] (PREPARE MEAS.)
14 Move the cursor to “TOUCH PROBE LENG (LENGTH OFFSET Hs 21)”. Bring the touch probe
into contact with the reference plane by using the pulse handle.
Set the feedrate at "x 1" immediately before contacting with the sensor.
When the touch probe contacts with the touch sensor, the touch probe lights up in red.
6130-E P-218
15 Press the WRITE key at the contacted position.

The calculated result from “ACTUAL PO – REF FACE NO.S 22 Z” is set to TOUCH PROBE
LENG (LENGTH OFFSET Hs 21). The set value is the relative value with the reference tool in
the relative offset, or is the touch probe length in the absolute offset.
Now the touch probe length offset has been finished. Press [F7] (next) to proceed to the touch
probe radius compensation.
ME61315R0300600100003
[Supplement]
To correct the touch probe length offset after pressing [F7] (next), locate the cursor to
TOUCH PROBE RAD and press [F6] (return step).
16 Attach the reference ring to the table.
17 Remove the touch probe from the spindle by manual operation, and then attach the sling
gauge.
18 Locate the cursor to REF RING DIA, enter the reference ring diameter, and press the WRITE
key.
6130-E P-219
19 Bring the sling gauge into contact with the reference ring by operating the pulse handle. Then,
determine the reference ring center by rotating the spindle at idle so that the spindle center and
the reference ring center agree.
ME61315R0300600100004
20 Check that the cursor is located at 3. REF RING CENTER (RING CENTER NO.S 3 X, Y) with
the reference ring center and the spindle center in agreement, and press the WRITE key.
21 The zero offset value with which the position (X, Y) where the reference ring center and the
spindle center agree becomes “0” will be set. (No setting operation is required for Z.)
22 Remove the sling gauge from the spindle by manual operation, and then attach the touch
probe.
23 Perform spindle orientation by manual operation.
If radius compensation with the touch probe is performed without spindle orientation,
gauging error may be caused.
24 After inserting the touch probe into the master ring by approximately 7 mm (0.28 in.) by
operating the pulse handle, bring it into contact to the +X side.
Set the feedrate at "x 1" immediately before contacting with the sensor. When the touch probe
contacts with the +X side, the touch probe lights up in red.
25 Locate the cursor to TOUCH PROBE RAD (radius compensation value 1 (+X Ds 21), and
press the WRITE key to set the radius compensation value.
26 Perform the operation to radius compensations 2, 3, and 4 in the same manner.

When setting radius compensations 1 and 2 (+X, -X), however, set the ACTUAL PO Hs Y to
"0". And when setting radius compensations 3 and 4 (+Y, -Y), set the ACTUAL PO Hs X to "0".
27 Check each offset value when all of radius compensations 1, 2, 3 and 4 are set.
It is desirable that the mutual error be within 0.03 for enough accuracy.
Now the radius compensation has been finished.
28 Press the [F8] (CLOSE).

6130-E P-220
4-2-2. Preparation for tool length gauging
Procedure :
1 Prepare the touch sensor and the reference tool.
2 Attach the touch sensor to the table.
3 Select the manual mode by pressing the "manual" operation mode key, and display the TOOL
DATA screen by pressing the "tool data setting" key.
ME61315R0300600110001
4 Select the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet.

For the detail of the manual tool operation, refer to “2-2-4 in SECTION 2” in the OPERATION
MANUAL - DATA OPERATION-.
6 Locate the cursor to the pot tool correspondence table (on the left side of the screen) and press
the [F6] (TOOL GAUGING).
6130-E P-221
7 Press the [F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT) to set the title of the window below to MANUAL
GAUGING MENU.
ME61315R0300600110002
8 Press the [F4] (T-LEN.GAU.PRE.).
ME61315R0300600110003
9 Press the [F1] (SET), enter the REF TOOL LENG, and press the WRITE key.
10 Position the reference tool at the touch sensor center.

Perform zero offset in order to put the position data of the touch sensor into the memory after
step 11.
Zero offset for the system No.10 (REF FACE NO.S 10, ZERO OFFSET NO.S 10) is the one for
registration of touch sensor positions and not used in regular programs.
11 Check that the cursor is located at SENSOR ZERO X, Y (REF FACE NO.S 10 X), press the
WRITE key. The zero offset value is set so that the X coordinate of the touch sensor becomes
“0”.
12 Check that the cursor is located at SENSOR ZERO X, Y (REF FACE NO.S 10 Y), press the
WRITE key. The zero offset value is set so that the Y coordinate of the touch sensor becomes
“0”.
6130-E P-222
13 Bring the reference tool into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
Set the feedrate at “x 1” immediately before contacting with the sensor.
When the reference tool contacts with the touch sensor, the touch sensor lights up in red.
14 Check that the cursor is located at SENSOR ZERO Z (ZERO OFFSET NO.S 10 Z), press the
WRITE key. The zero offset value is set so that the Z coordinate of the touch sensor becomes
“0”.
15 Move the reference tool away from the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
4-2-3. Preparation for tool radius gauging
Procedure :
3 Select the manual mode by pressing the "manual" operation mode key, and display the TOOL
DATA screen by pressing the "tool data setting" key.
ME61315R0300600070001

MANUAL - DATA OPERATION-.
6130-E P-223
GAUGING MENU.
ME61315R0300600070002
8 Press the [F5] (CUT-R.GAU. PRE).
ME61315R0300600070003
9 Press the [F1] (SET), enter the REF TOOL DIA, and press the WRITE key.

step 11.
Zero offset for the system No.11 (REF FACE NO.S 11) is the one for registration of touch
sensor positions and not used in regular programs.
11 Bring the reference tool into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
Set the feedrate at “x 1” immediately before contacting with the sensor.
When the reference tool contacts with the touch sensor, the touch sensor lights up in red.
12 Check that the cursor is located at SENSOR ZERO X, Y, Z (REF FACE NO.S 11 X), press the
“0”.
6130-E P-224
13 Check that the cursor is located at SENSOR ZERO X, Y, Z (REF FACE NO.S 11 Y), press the
“0”.
14 Check that the cursor is located at SENSOR ZERO X, Y, Z (REF FACE NO.S 11 Z), press the
WRITE key. The zero offset value is set so that the Z coordinate of the touch sensor becomes
“0”.
15 Move the reference tool away from the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.

6130-E P-225
4-3. Work Gauging

The procedure for manual workpiece gauging is explained below.
With workpiece gauging there are nine ways of gauging as follows.
Angle measurement
End face measurement
Corner (right angle and free angle) measurement
Circle (ID and OD) measurement
Center between end faces (inner and outer) measurement
Level difference measurement
Angle and center between two circles measurement
Center between three circles measurement
Intersection and center between four circles measurement
Each measurement window is displayed by selecting a measurement figure above. The

measurement figures are provided in the WK SETUP sheet in the "OPERATION screen". Select the
figures by either of the following two ways:
 Touch he figure in the "MANUAL" operation mode.
 Locate the cursor to the WORK ZERO table, press [F6] (MEASURE WORK), select a desired
figure by the cursor key, and then press the WRITE key.
6130-E P-226
4-3-1. Angle measurement

Angle measurement is used to determine the angle (A) that is formed by the side face and the X-
axis by measuring the side face.
Procedure :
1 Press the "MANUAL" operation mode key to display the "OPERATION screen".
Select the WK SETUP sheet and locate the cursor to the WORK ZERO table.
Select the zero group no. for zero offset and press the [F6] (WORK GAUGING).
ME61315R0300600120001
2 Press the [F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT) to set the window title to "MANUAL". Then select the
icon of angle from the measurement figures.
3 As the MEASURE WORK (ANGLE) window appears, select the measurement direction (+X, -
X, +Y, -Y) by the function key.
ME61315R0300600120002
6130-E P-227
4 Check that the measurement direction is entered at TOUCH POSI 1, and bring the touch probe
into contact with the workpiece side face to be measured by operating the pulse handle.
contacts with the workpiece side face, the touch probe lights up in red.
5 When the WRITE key is pressed at the contacted position, the touch position in the current
coordinate system is input to TOUCH POSI 1, and the cursor moves to TOUCH POSI 2.
6 In the same manner perform measurement for TOUCH POSI 2. When the measurement is
completed, the angle computed from TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 is displayed at
ANGLE.
7 Locate the cursor to "C" of ZERO OFFSET No to enter a desired angle. The value is entered
by pressing the CAL function key. To set the measured plane to "0" degree, enter "0". The
entered value is set in the WORK ZERO table.
8 Press the [F8] (CLOSE) to return the screen to the operation screen.
4-3-2. End face measurement

End face measurement is used to determine the side face position (X, Y or Z) by measuring one
side face.
Procedure :
icon of end face from the measurement figures.
3 As the MEASURE WORK (END FACE) window appears, select the measurement direction
(+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by the function key.
ME61315R0300600130001
6130-E P-228
4 Check that the measurement direction is entered at TOUCH POSI, and bring the touch probe
coordinate system is input to TOUCH POSI and END FACE POSI.
[Supplement]
It is possible to store the measured position data of END FACE POSI by pressing [F7]
(result save-end face).
The stored END FACE POSI can be pasted to TOUCH POSI of center between two end
faces measurement or level difference measurement by pressing [F6] (result paste-end
face),
If the "circle position" is stored, the stored value of END FACE POSI is deleted.
6 Locate the cursor to the measured axis of ZERO OFFSET / No to enter a desired value. To set
the measured plane to "0", enter "0". This is the end of end face measurement.
To enter the zeros of other axes with the same touch probe position, go to step 7. To end the
operation, go to step 8.
7 Locate the cursor to "X", "Y", "Z" of ZERO OFFSET / No to enter a desired value to the
measurement position. The value is entered by pressing the CAL function key. To set the
measured touch probe position to "0" degree, enter "0". The entered value is set in the WORK
ZERO table.
6130-E P-229
4-3-3. Corner (right angle and free angle) measurement

Corner measurement is used to determine the intersection point of the lines of two planes (X, Y), an
angle (A1) that is formed by the intersecting lines of two planes (X, Y), and the angle (A) that is
formed by one plane and the X-axis by measuring two workpiece side planes
Procedure :
icon of corner from the measurement figures.
3 As the MEASURE WORK (CORNER) window appears, select the CORNER SHAPE (RIGHT
ANG or ARB ANG) by the function key.
ME61315R0300600140001
4 As the cursor moves to TOUCH POSI 1, select the measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by
the function key.
Measurement can be started with either plane between two, however, the angle (A) formed by
the X-axis is the angle which is formed by the plane determined by TOUCH POSI 1 and
TOUCH POSI 2.
coordinate system is input to TOUCH POSI 1.
7 In the same manner perform measurement for TOUCH POSI 2 and subsequent. When RIGHT
ANG is selected at CORNER SHAPE, measurement must be performed to TOUCH POSI 3;
and to TOUCH POSI 4 when "ARB ANG" is selected
6130-E P-230
8 When the measurement is completed, the angle formed by the plane and X-axis computed by
TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 is displayed at "A" position of TOUCH POSI 2; and the
intersection (X, Y) of two planes is displayed at CORNER POSI.
When "ARB ANG" is selected at CORNER SHAPE, the angle formed by the plane determined
by TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 and the plane by TOUCH POSI 3 and TOUCH POSI 4
is displayed at "A1" of "corner position, formed angle".
9 Locate the cursor to "X", "Y" of ZERO OFFSET / No to enter a desired value to the
measured corner position to "0", enter "0" to "X" and "Y" respectively. The entered value is set
in the WORK ZERO table.
By entering a desired angle at "C" of ZERO OFFSET / No, it is possible to set the angle
formed by the workpiece plane and the X-axis in the same way as in "4-3-1. Angle
measurement". In that case, however, measurement for CORNER POSI must be performed
again.
4-3-4. Circle (ID and OD) measurement

Circle measurement is used to determine the circle center (X, Y) and the diameter (D) by measuring
the hole inner diameter or four points along the cylinder outer diameter.
Procedure :
icon of circle from the measurement figures.

6130-E P-231
3 As the window below appears, select the MEASURE METHOD (IN DIA or OUT DIA) by the
function key.
ME61315R0300600150001
4 As the cursor moves to TOUCH POSI 1, select the measurement direction by the function key.
5 Bring the touch probe into contact with the inner diameter of the hole or the outer diameter of
the cylinder to be measured by operating the pulse handle.
contacts with either the inner diameter of the hole or the outer diameter of the cylinder, the
touch probe lights up in red.
7 In the same manner perform measurement for TOUCH POSI 2 through TOUCH POSI 4. When
the measurement is completed, the circle center position "X", "Y" and the diameter "D" are
displayed at CENTER POSI, DIAM.
[Supplement]
It is possible to store the measured position data of "center position" by pressing [F7] (result
save-circle).
The stored "center position" can be pasted to "circle position" in the measurement of the
center of two, three or four circles by pressing [F6] (result paste- circle).
If the END FACE POSI is stored, the stored value of "circle position" is deleted.
measured center position to "0", enter "0" to "X" and "Y" respectively. The entered value is set
6130-E P-232
4-3-5. Center between end faces (inside and outside) measurement

Center between end faces measurement is used to determine the center position between side
faces (X, Y) and the width between side (L) by measuring parallel two side faces.
Procedure :
icon of center between end faces from the measurement figures.
3 As the window below appears, select the MEASURE METHOD either from OUTSIDE or
INSIDE by the function key.
ME61315R0300600200001
4 When the end face is parallel to the X-axis or Y-axis, select 2 POSI at MEASURE METHOD,
when not parallel, select 3 POSI by the function key.
the function key.
6130-E P-233
8 In the same manner perform measurement for TOUCH POSI 2 and subsequent. When 2 POSI
is selected at MEASURE METHOD, measurement must be performed to TOUCH POSI 2; and
to TOUCH POSI 3 when 3 POSI is selected.
In measurement with 3 POSI, TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 need to touch the same
plane.
9 When the measurement is completed, the center position "X", "Y" and the width "L" between
side faces are displayed at CENTER POSI/WIDTHS.
Furthermore, when 3 POSI is selected at MEASURE METHOD, the angle formed by the plane
determined by TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 and the X-axis is displayed at "A" of
TOUCH POSI 2.
measurement". In that case, however, measurement for "center position" must be performed
again.
6130-E P-234
4-3-6. Level difference measurement

Level difference measurement is used to determine the level difference between side faces by
measuring the two side faces which is perpendicular to the reference axis (X/Y/Z).
Procedure :
icon of level difference from the measurement figures.
3 As the window below appears, select measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by the function
key.
ME61315R0300600250001
6 In the same manner perform measurement for TOUCH POSI 2. When the measurement is
completed, the width computed from TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 is displayed at
DIFFER. LEVEL.
[Supplement]
It is possible to store the measured position data of TOUCH POSI by pressing [F7] (result
save-end face).
The stored TOUCH POSI can be pasted to TOUCH POSI of center between two end faces
measurement or level difference measurement by pressing [F6] (result paste-end face),
If the "circle position" is stored, the stored value of TOUCH POSI is deleted.
6130-E P-235
7 To use the measured level difference with the zero offset, locate the cursor to "X", "Y", "Z" of
ZERO OFFSET / No and press [F2] (ADD). Then, enter the measured level difference value.
The entered value is set in the WORK ZERO table.
4-3-7. Angle and center between two circles (ID and OD) measurement
Angle and center between two circles measurement is used to determine the angle formed by the
line that connects the centers of two circles and the X-axis by measuring the center position
between two circles (hole or cylinder).
Procedure :
icon of angle and center between two circles from the measurement figures.
3 As the window below appears, locate the cursor to CIRCLE POSI 1 and press the function key
[F1] (circle measurement).
ME61315R0300600160001
6130-E P-236
4 As the window below appears, determine the center position and the diameter of each circle in
the same manner in steps 3 to 7 in "4-3-4. Circle (ID and OD) measurement".
ME61315R0300600160002
5 The window below appears when the [F8] (CLOSE) is pressed. The center position of the
measured circle is displayed at CIRCLE POSI 1. Perform measurement for CIRCLE POSI 2 in
the same manner as above.
ME61315R0300600160003
[Supplement]
It is possible to store the measured position data of "circle position" by pressing [F7] (result
save-circle).
The stored "circle position" can be pasted to "circle position" in the measurement of the
6130-E P-237
6 When the measurements for CIRCLE POSI 1 and CIRCLE POSI 2 are completed, the angle
and the pitch computed from CIRCLE POSI 1 and CIRCLE POSI 2 are displayed.
ME61315R0300600160004
7 Locate the cursor to "C" of ZERO OFFSET / No to enter a desired angle. The value is entered
by pressing the CAL function key. To set the line that connects CIRCLE POSI 1 and CIRCLE
POSI 2 to "0" degree, enter "0". The entered value is set in the WORK ZERO table.
6130-E P-238
4-3-8. Center between three circles (ID and OD) measurement

Center between three circles measurement is used to determine the center position (X, Y) and the
diameter (D) of the pitch circle from the center of three circles by measuring the center position
between three circles (hole or cylinder).
Procedure :
icon of center between three circles from the measurement figures.
3 As the window below appears, locate the cursor to CIRCLE POSI 1 and press the [F1] (circle
measurement).
ME61315R0300600170001
ME61315R0300600170002
6130-E P-239
measured circle is displayed at CIRCLE POSI 1. Perform measurement for CIRCLE POSI 2
and CIRCLE POSI 3 in the same manner as above.
ME61315R0300600170003
[Supplement]
save-circle).
6 When the measurements for CIRCLE POSI 1 through CIRCLE POSI 3 are completed, the
center position and the diameter of the pitch circle from three circle centers are displayed at
CENTER POSI, DIAM.
ME61315R0300600170004
6130-E P-240
measurement
Intersection and center between four circles measurement is used to determine the intersection
point (X, Y) of the lines by measuring the center position between four circles (hole or cylinder) and
by creating the lines from the centers of four circles that intersect each other.
Procedure :
icon of level difference angle and center between four circles from the measurement
figures.
measurement).
ME61315R0300600180001
ME61315R0300600180002
6130-E P-241
through CIRCLE POSI 4 in the same manner as above.
ME61315R0300600180003
[Supplement]
save-circle).
intersection point (X, Y) that formed by the lines come from the centers of four circle is
displayed at INTERSECTION.
ME61315R0300600180004
measured intersection position to "0", enter "0" to "X" and "Y" respectively. The entered value is
set in the WORK ZERO table.
6130-E P-242
4-3-10.Measurement result
The measured results obtained by MANUAL/INTERACT measurement are recorded in the MEAS.
RESULT window.
How to display the MEAS. RESULT window is described below.
Procedure :
2 Select the WK SETUP sheet and locate the cursor to a measurement figure.
3 Press [F5] (DISPLAY MEAS.).
ME61315R0300600190001
The MEAS. RESULT window appears.
ME61315R0300600190002
The detail of the MEAS. RESULT window is as follows.
Leftmost column Numbers (the smaller, the later)

2nd column on the left Measurement kind
X column Measurement result of X-axis
Y column Measurement result of Y-axis
Z/A column Measurement result of Z-axis or angle A
L/D/A1 column Measurement result of width L/level difference L, diameter D or
angle A1
DATE column Measurement date
TIME column Measurement time
CSV output
The measurement result displayed on the MEAS. RESULT window can be output as a file with CSV
format.
When [F1] (CSV output) is pressed with the MEAS. RESULT window displayed, the file is output to
the MD1 device with the file name "Meas_************.csv".
"************" consists of figures in 12 digits, in which "year/month/day/hour/min/sec" when the file is
created is set.
6130-E P-243
4-4. Tool Length Gauging

The tool length gauging function is used to measure the tool length offset value of machining tools.
Procedure :
1 Press the "MANUAL" operation mode key to display the TOOL DATA screen.
ME61315R0300600260001
6130-E P-244
GAUGING MENU.
ME61315R0300600260002
5 Press the [F2] (T-LENGTH MEASURE).
6 As the window below appears, check that the cursor is located at OFFSET TYPE. Then select
either "shape offset" or "wear offset" for the measurement result to be set.
[Supplement]
When "shape offset" is selected, the measurement result is input to SHAP OFFSET of the
tool length offset and WEAR OFFS is set to "0". When "wear offset" is selected, the value at
SHAP OFFSET of the tool length offset does not change and the increased or decreased
value of SHAP OFFSET is input to WEAR OFFS.
ME61315R0300600260003
7 Locate the cursor to SELECT CYCLE and press [F1] (-Z).
8 Locate the cursor to TOOL-L OFST NO. to which measurement result is entered.
6130-E P-245
9 Bring the tool edge to be measured into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse
handle.
Set the feedrate at "x 1" immediately before contacting with the sensor. When the tool contacts
with the touch sensor, the touch sensor lights up in red.
[Supplement]
When setting the tool length offset no. to other than HA, HB and HC, locate the cursor to
TOOL-L OFSET NO. to enter a desired no.
10 Press the WRITE key at the contacted position. The measured offset value is input to SHAP
OFFSET or WEAR OFFS of the selected TOOL-L OFST NO..
11 Press the [F8] (CLOSE) to return the screen to the TOOL DATA screen.
6130-E P-246
4-5. Cutter Radius Gauging

The cutter radius gauging function is used to measure the tool radius compensation value of
machining tools.
Procedure :
ME61315R0300600270001
6130-E P-247
GAUGING MENU.
ME61315R0300600270002
5 Press the [F3] (T-RADIUS MEASURE).
[Supplement]
tool radius compensation and WEAR OFFS is set to "0". When "wear offset" is selected, the
value at SHAP OFFSET of the tool radius compensation does not change and the increased
or decreased value of SHAP OFFSET is input to WEAR OFFS.
ME61315R0300600270003
6130-E P-248
7 Locate the cursor to SELECT AXIS and select the measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by
the function key.
8 Locate the cursor to CUTTER R COMP NO. to which measurement result is entered. Bring the
tool edge to be measured into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
Set the feedrate at "x 1" immediately before contacting with the sensor. When the tool contacts
with the touch sensor, the touch sensor lights up in red.
[Supplement]
When setting the cutter radius compensation no. to other than DA, DB and DC, locate the
cursor to CUTTER R COMP N. to enter a desired no.
9 Press the WRITE key at the contacted position. The measured compensation value is input to
SHAP OFFSET or WEAR OFFS of the selected CUTTER R COM.
6130-E P-249
4-6. Error
4-6-1. Error List
Error Description
5361 This error occurs when the input data no. is "0" in specification of the
Zero set input NO zero offset no.
5362 This error occurs when the input data no. is "0" or smaller in
Tool length offset input NO. specification of the tool length offset no.
Cutter R. comp input NO. specification of the cutter radius compensation no.
5209 The error occurs in either of the following cases.
Input data overflow [Tool length measurement parameter]
(1) The input data is out of the range between 0 and 2000.000 in
specification of the maximum travel distance to the contact
position.
specification of the maximum tool length to the contact position.
The error occurs in any of the following cases.

[Workpiece measurement ]
(1) In specification of the zero offset no., the input data no. exceeds
the number of workpiece coordinate system sets prepared for the
user.
a. The zero offset no. is 201 or larger when the number of
workpiece coordinate system sets is 200.
b. The zero offset no. is 101 or larger when the number of
c. The zero offset no. is 51 or larger when the number of
d. The zero offset no. is 21 or larger when the number of
The error occurs under the following case.

[Tool length measurement ]
In specification of the tool length offset no., the input data no.
exceeds the number of tool sets (999).

[cutter radius measurement ]
In specification of the cutter radius compensation no., the input data
no. exceeds the number of tool sets (999).
The FIND function except specification of the zero offset no.
for a numerals impossible.
6130-E P-250
SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION
5-1. Overview
5-1-1. Specifications
In the interactive gauging function, the zero point and tool length offset values are set by using the
touch probe or the touch sensor.
In the interactive gauging function, the operator carries out the operation in the manual mode by
using the display screen in an interactive style, unlike the automatic gauging or automatic tool length
offset function. Thus the operator does not have to learn to how to create the program special for
gauging.
Since this function can be used to set the data easily and readily without referring to the program
explanation manual, it is recommended to use this function for the following cases.
 Setting the zero or the tool length offset data for machining a one of a kind workpiece.
 Setting the zero or the tool length offset data for machining the first workpiece, and beginning
production from the next workpiece using the set data.
 Setting the zero or the tool length offset data for machining another workpiece by interrupting
operation during the repeating lot production using the same part program.
In interactive gauging, tool radius compensation cannot be measured. Use manual gauging to set
the tool radius compensation value.
6130-E P-251
5-1-2. Outline of interactive gauging function

The outlines of each interactive gauging function are described as follows.
[Supplement]
Since the interactive gauging function is used in the manual operation mode, all manual
operations including rapid traverse, cutting feed, feed by the pulse handle are enabled during
gauging. Therefore, move the axis by manual operation to the position close to the target
position. Switch the operation to the automatic cycle by selecting the cycle and pressing START
to bring the axis into contact with the touch probe and touch sensor. Slide hold and override are
enabled during automatic cycle. Use those operations as appropriate. Manual operation can be
used during slide hold. To restart operation from slide hold, press the START button.
Gauging preparation function
The gauging preparation function is used to prepare gauging of a workpiece and a tool. Locate the
cursor to the gauging diagram in the WK SETUP sheet in the operation screen, select [F4]
(PREPARE MEAS.), and execute each preparation function in the following order.
1. Reference plane setting

2. Touch probe length offset
3. Reference ring center
4. Touch probe radius compensation
[Supplement]
1) Perform the tool length offset and the tool radius compensation with the touch probe
accordingly as appropriate after performed once.
2) Make sure to perform the tool length offset and the tool radius compensation with the touch
probe after the filler was changed or the filler collided.
3) To perform gauging with high accuracy, reduce runout of the touch probe.
6130-E P-252
Workpiece gauging function
The workpiece gauging function is used to perform gauging the length, hole diameter, and center
coordinate of a workpiece and to perform zero offset by using the touch probe.
Use the function by selecting a suitable pattern from the following gauging patterns according to the
shape of the workpiece.
(1) Angle
(2) End face
(3) Corner (right angle, free angle)
(4) Circle (ID, OD)
(5) Center between end faces (of inner and outer end)
(6) Level difference
(7) Angle and center between two circles
(8) Center between three circles
(9) Intersection point and center between four circles
ME61315R0300700240001
[Supplement]

Preparation for workpiece gauging".
6130-E P-253
Tool length gauging function
The tool length gauging function is used to gauge the tool length by using the touch sensor and
perform tool length offset according to the result.
In this function, the tool of which length from the reference tool or gauge line to the tool edge is
known is used as a gauge.
ME61315R0300700250001
Perform the tool length offset in either of the following methods.
 Relative offset method

The length difference from the tool used as a gauge is applied as the tool length offset value.
Reference tool

ME61315R0300700250002
 Absolute offset method

The length from the gauge line to the tool edge of the tool is applied as the tool length offset
value.
Gauge line

ME61315R0300700250003
[Supplement]
Before performing tool length gauging, perform gauging preparation by referring to "5-3-2.
Preparation for tool length gauging"
6130-E P-254
Tool length gauging parameter
There are two items with the tool length gauging parameter as follows. The parameter set data are
retained once set until changed next time.
 Maximum travel distance to the contact position

Position the tool to a position close to the touch sensor by manual operation and set the travel
amount to the contact position when the tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor. If the
contact signal is not output even when the distance is over the preset travel distance, an alarm
occurs to return the touch probe to the start point. The travel distance is set to 50 mm (1.97 in.)
in the factory.
 Maximum tool length

Set the maximum tool length to be used. Keep in mind that the value to be set differs between
the relative tool length offset and the absolute tool length offset.
Set the home position with the maximum tool length in the AUTO(-Z) mode. When performing
tool length offset, determine the distance with which the tool approaches the touch sensor at a
rapid traverse rate.
H.P. 5
1 2
Maximum tool length + 10 mm 3 4
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Movement order
Touch sensor
Auto mode cycle
ME61315R0300700260001
If the tool length is set shorter than the length of the actual tool, the tool may collide with the touch
sensor. Set the tool length of the longest one among all tools to be used in measurement.
6130-E P-255
5-2. Setting gauging parameter

The gauging parameter function is used to set the axis travel amount in tool length gauging.
The parameter set data are retained once set until changed next time.
5-2-1. Setting tool length gauging parameter
Procedure :
ME61315R0300700070001
6130-E P-256
4 Press the [F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT) to set the title of the window below to INTERACTIVE
GAUGING MENU.
ME61315R0300700070002
5 Press the [F2] (TOOL LENGTH).
6 Press the [F7] (gauging parameter).
7 As the window below appears, locate the cursor to MIGRATION LENGTH UNT and enter the
value.
ME61315R0300700070003
8 Locate the cursor to MAX TOOL L and enter the value.
If MAX TOOL L is set shorter than the length of the actual tool, the tool may collide with the
touch sensor. Set the tool length of the longest one among all tools to be used in
measurement.
6130-E P-257
5-3. Preparation for Gauging

The preparation for workpiece gauging and tool gauging is explained below.
Perform preparation by following the procedures below before using each gauging function.
5-3-1. Preparation for workpiece gauging
Procedure :
1 Prepare the touch probe, reference block, master ring, and sling gauge.
2 Attach the reference block to the table.
3 Select the manual mode by pressing the "MANUAL" operation mode key, and display the
operation screen by pressing the "OPERATION screen" key.
4 Select the WK SETUP sheet and locate the cursor to the WORK ZERO table.
ME61315R0300700040001
5 Press the [F6] (WORK GAUGING).

MANUAL - DATA OPERATION -.
6130-E P-258
7 Press the[F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT) to set the window title to INTERACTIVE. Then, press the
[F4] (GAUGING PREPARE).
ME61315R0300700040002
8 Bring the reference tool into contact with the reference block by operating the pulse handle.
Set the feedrate at "x 1" immediately before contacting with the sensor.
At this point, perform zero offset to put the position of the reference plane into the memory.
Zero offset for the system No.22 (REF FACE NO.S 22) is the one for registration of reference
plane positions and not used in regular programs.
9 Check that the cursor is located at REF. SURFACE SET (REF FACE NO.S 22 X, Y), press the
WRITE key. The zero offset value is set so that the contact position (X, Y) becomes “0”.
10 Check that the cursor is located at REF. SURFACE SET (REF FACE NO.S 22 Z). Set the Z
position in the reference plane by following the message shown in the bottom of the screen.
 When setting the touch probe length offset by relative offset:

Set the thickness of the reference block and press the WRITE key.
 When setting the touch probe length offset by absolute offset:

Set the sum of the reference block thickness and the reference tool length and press the
WRITE key.
11 Move the reference tool away from the reference block by using the pulse handle.
12 Press [F8] (CLOSE). Mount the touch probe to the spindle by [F2] (OPERATE TOOL).
13 Press [F4] (PREPARE MEAS.)
14 Move the cursor to “TOUCH PROBE LENG (LENGTH OFFSET Hs 5)”. Position the touch
probe close to the reference plane by operating the pulse handle.
6130-E P-259
15 Press the cycle selection [F1] (?Z) key and then the START button. When the touch probe
contact with the reference plane, the calculated result from “ACTUAL PO – REF FACE NO.S
22 Z” is set to TOUCH PROBE LENG (LENGTH OFFSET Hs 5). The set value is the relative
value with the reference tool in the relative offset, or is the touch probe length in the absolute
offset.
Now the touch probe length offset has been finished. Press [F7] (next) to proceed to the touch
probe radius compensation.
ME61315R0300700040003
[Supplement]
To correct the touch probe length offset after pressing [F7] (next), locate the cursor to
TOUCH PROBE RAD and press [F6] (return step).
16 Attach the reference ring to the table.
17 Remove the touch probe from the spindle by manual operation, and then attach the sling
gauge.
18 Locate the cursor to REF RING DIA, enter the reference ring diameter, and press the WRITE
key.
6130-E P-260
19 Bring the sling gauge into contact with the reference ring by operating the pulse handle. Then,
determine the reference ring center by rotating the spindle at idle so that the spindle center and
the reference ring center agree.
ME61315R0300700040004
20 Check that the cursor is located at REF RING CENTER (RING CENTER NO.S 3 X, Y) with the
reference ring center and the spindle center in agreement, and press the WRITE key.
21 The zero offset value with which the position (X, Y) where the reference ring center and the
spindle center agree becomes “0” will be set. (No setting operation is required for Z.)
22 Remove the sling gauge from the spindle by manual operation, and then attach the touch
probe.
If radius compensation with the touch probe is performed without spindle orientation,
gauging error may be caused.
24 Insert the touch probe into the master ring by approximately 7 mm (0.28 in.) by operating the
pulse handle.
25 Locate the cursor to "Touch probe radius compensation (radius compensation value 1 (+X Ds
1)", press the axis selection key [F1] (AUTO (X)) and then press the START button.
26 Perform the automatic cycle. The touch probe radius compensation is input to radius
compensation value 1, 2, 3 and 4.
27 Check each offset value when all of radius compensations 1, 2, 3 and 4 are displayed.
It is desirable that the mutual error be within 0.03 for enough accuracy.
Now the radius compensation has been finished.

6130-E P-261
5-3-2. Preparation for tool length gauging
Procedure :
TOOL DATA screen by pressing the "tool data setting" key.
ME61315R0300700050001

MANUAL - DATA OPERATION -.
GAUGING MENU.
ME61315R0300700050002
6130-E P-262
8 Press the [F4] (GAUGING PREPARE).
ME61315R0300700050003
9 Press the [F1] (SET), enter the REF TOOL LENG, and press the WRITE key.
10 Position the reference tool at the touch sensor center.

step 11.
Zero offset for the system No.1 (REF FACE NO.S 1, ZERO OFFSET NO.S 1) is the one for
registration of touch sensor positions and not used in regular programs.
11 Check that the cursor is located at SENSOR ZERO X, Y (REF FACE NO.S 1 X), press the
“0”.
12 Check that the cursor is located at SENSOR ZERO X, Y (REF FACE NO.S 1 Y), press the
“0”.
13 Lower the reference tool close to the touch sensor manually.

Set the distance between the reference tool and the touch sensor shorter than the maximum
travel distance for the contact set in the tool length gauging parameter.
For the detail of the tool length gauging parameter, refer to “5-2-1. Setting tool length gauging
parameter”.
14 Check that the cursor is located at SENSOR ZERO Z (ZERO OFFSET NO.S 10 Z), press the
cycle axis [F1] (-Z) key.
15 Press the START button.

The gauging cycle will start. The reference tool will contact with the touch sensor and then
returns to the original position automatically. Then the zero offset value is set so that the Z
coordinate of the touch sensor becomes “0”.
6130-E P-263
16 Move the reference tool away from the touch sensor by manual operation.

6130-E P-264
5-4. Workpiece Gauging

The procedure for interactive workpiece gauging is explained below.
With workpiece gauging there are nine ways of gauging as follows.
Angle measurement
End face measurement
Corner (right angle and free angle) measurement
Circle (ID and OD) measurement
Center between end faces (inner and outer) measurement
Level difference measurement
Angle and center between two circles measurement
Center between three circles measurement
Intersection and center between four circles measurement
Each measurement window is displayed by selecting a measurement figure above. The

measurement figures are provided in the WK SETUP sheet in the "OPERATION screen". Select the
figures by either of the following two ways:
 Touch he figure in the "MANUAL" operation mode.
 Locate the cursor to the WORK ZERO table, press [F6] (MEASURE WORK), select a desired
figure by the cursor key, and then press the WRITE key.
6130-E P-265
5-4-1. Angle measurement

Angle measurement is used to determine the angle (A) that is formed by the side face and the X-
axis by measuring the side face.
Procedure :
ME61315R0300700080001
2 Press the [F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT) to set the window title to INTERACTIVE. Then select the
icon of angle from the measurement figures.
3 As the window below appears, select the measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by the
function key.
ME61315R0300700080002
6130-E P-266
4 Check that the measurement direction is entered at TOUCH POSI 1, position the touch probe
to a position close to the end face, and press the START button.
5 The gauging cycle starts, and after gauging, the touch position in the current coordinate system
is input to TOUCH POSI 1. Then the touch probe returns to the set position in step 4.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to perform measurement for TOUCH POSI 2. When the measurement is
completed, the contact position in the current coordinate system is input to TOUCH POSI 2,
and the angle computed from TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 is displayed at ANGLE.
The touch probe returns to the positioned position.
by pressing the CAL function key. To set the measured plane to "0" degree, enter "0". The
entered value is set in the WORK ZERO table.
6130-E P-267
5-4-2. End face measurement

End face measurement is used to determine the side face position (X, Y or Z) by measuring one
side face.
Procedure :
2 Press the [F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT) to set the window title to INTERACTIVE. Then select the
icon of end face from the measurement figures.
3 As the window below appears, select the measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y, -Z) by the
function key.
ME61315R0300700090001
4 Check that the measurement direction is entered at TOUCH POSI, position the touch probe to
a position close to the end face, and press the START button.
is input to TOUCH POSI and END FACE POSI. Then the touch probe returns to the set
position in step 4.
6 Locate the cursor to "X", "Y", "Z" of ZERO OFFSET / No to enter a desired value to the
measured END FACE POSI to "0", enter "0" to "X", "Y" and "Z" respectively. The entered value
is set in the WORK ZERO table.
6130-E P-268
5-4-3. Corner (right angle and free angle) measurement

Corner measurement is used to determine the intersection point of the lines of two planes (X, Y), an
angle (A1) that is formed by the intersecting lines of two planes (X, Y), and the angle (A) that is
formed by one plane and the X-axis by measuring two workpiece side planes.
Procedure :
2 Press the [F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT) to set the window title to "INTERACTIVE". Then select
the icon of corner from the measurement figures.
3 As the window below appears, select the corner shape (RIGHT ANG or ARB ANG) by the
function key.
ME61315R0300700100001
the function key.
Measurement can be started with either plane between two, however, the angle (A) formed by
the X-axis is the angle which is formed by the plane determined by TOUCH POSI 1 and
TOUCH POSI 2.
is input to TOUCH POSI 1. Then the touch probe returns to the set position in step 5.
7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to perform measurement for TOUCH POSI 2 and subsequent. When
RIGHT ANG is selected at CORNER SHAPE, measurement must be performed to TOUCH
POSI 3; and to TOUCH POSI 4 when "ARB ANG" is selected.
6130-E P-269
8 When the measurement is completed, the angle formed by the plane and X-axis computed by
TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 is displayed at "A" position of TOUCH POSI 2; and the
intersection (X, Y) of two planes is displayed at CORNER POSI.
When "ARB ANG" is selected at CORNER SHAPE, the angle formed by the plane determined
by TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 and the plane by TOUCH POSI 3 and TOUCH POSI 4
is displayed at "A1" of "corner position, formed angle".
measured corner position to "0", enter "0" to "X" and "Y" respectively. The entered value is set
measurement". In that case, however, measurement for CORNER POSI must be performed
again.
5-4-4. Circle (ID and OD) measurement

Circle measurement is used to determine the circle center (X, Y) and the diameter (D) by measuring
the hole inner diameter or four points along the cylinder outer diameter.
Procedure :
Select the zero group no. for zero offset and press the function key [F6] (WORK GAUGING).
the icon of circle from the measurement figures.

6130-E P-270
3 As the window below appears, select the MEASURE METHOD (IN DIA or OUT DIA) by the
function key.
ME61315R0300700110001
4 The cursor moves to TOUCH POSI 1.

To measure TOUCH POSI 1 through TOUCH POSI 4 one by one, select the measurement
direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by the function key.
To measure TOUCH POSI 1 through TOUCH POSI 4 automatically and continuously, select
AUTO (+X).
5 When measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) is selected in step 4, check that the
measurement direction is entered at TOUCH POSI 1. Position the touch probe to a position
close to the end face, and press the START button.
When AUTO (+X) is selected in step 4, position the touch probe to a position close to the circle
center, and press the START button.
6 The gauging cycle starts.

When measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) is selected in step 4, and after gauging, the touch
position in the current coordinate system is input to TOUCH POSI 1. The touch probe returns
to the positioned position. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to perform measurement from TOUCH POSI 2
to TOUCH POSI 4.
When AUTO (+X) is selected in step 4, measurement is automatically performed in the order of
TOUCH POSI 1 → TOUCH POSI 2 → TOUCH POSI 3 → TOUCH POSI 4 → TOUCH POSI 1
→ TOUCH POSI 2.
7 When the measurement is completed, the circle center position "X", "Y" and the diameter "D"
are displayed at CENTER POSI, DIAM.
6130-E P-271
5-4-5. Center between end faces (inside and outside) measurement

Center between end faces measurement is used to determine the center position between side
faces (X, Y) and the width between side (L) by measuring parallel two side faces.
Procedure :
2 Press the function key [F1] (MANUAL/INTERACT) to set the window title to "INTERACTIVE".
Then select the icon of center between end faces from the measurement figures.
3 As the window below appears, select the MEASURE METHOD either from OUTSIDE or
INSIDE by the function key.
ME61315R0300700120001
4 When the end face is parallel to the X-axis or Y-axis, select 2 POSI at MEASURE METHOD,
when not parallel, select 3 POSI by the function key.
5 The cursor moves to TOUCH POSI 1.

When measuring TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 with 2 POSI, or TOUCH POSI 1 through
TOUCH POSI 3 with 3 POSI, select the measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by the function
key in order to measure the touch position one by one.
With 2 POSI, to measure TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 automatically and continuously,
select AUTO. AUTO cannot be selected with 3 POSI.
When AUTO is selected, also select measurement direction of TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH
POSI 2.
Select the function key according to the table below.
TOUCH POSI 1 TOUCH POSI 2 Function key

+X -X AUTO (+X)
-X +X AUTO (-X)
+Y -Y AUTO (+Y)
-Y +Y AUTO (-Y)
6130-E P-272
6 When measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) is selected in step 5, check that the
measurement direction is entered at TOUCH POSI 1. Position the touch probe to a position
close to the end face, and press the START button.
When AUTO is selected in step 5, position the touch probe to a position close to the center
between end faces, and press the START button.
7 The gauging cycle starts.

When measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) is selected in step 5, and after gauging, the touch
position in the current coordinate system is input to TOUCH POSI 1. The touch probe returns
to the positioned position. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to perform measurement for TOUCH POSI 2
with 2 POSI or for TOUCH POSI 2 and TOUCH POSI 3 with 3 POSI.
When AUTO is selected in step 5, measurement is performed automatically in the order of
TOUCH POSI 1 → TOUCH POSI 2 and in the specified measurement direction.
In measurement with 3 POSI, TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 need to touch the same
plane.
8 When the measurement is completed, the center position "X", "Y" and the width "L" between
side faces are displayed at CENTER POSI/WIDTHS.
Furthermore, when 3 POSI is selected at MEASURE METHOD, the angle formed by the plane
determined by TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 and the X-axis is displayed at "A" of
TOUCH POSI 2.
measurement". In that case, however, measurement for "center position" must be performed
again.
6130-E P-273
5-4-6. Level difference measurement

Level difference measurement is used to determine the level difference between side faces by
measuring the two side faces which is perpendicular to the reference axis (X/Y/Z).
Procedure :
the icon of level difference from the measurement figures.
3 As the window below appears, select the measurement direction (+X, -X, +Y, -Y, -Z) by the
function key.
ME61315R0300700130001
is input to TOUCH POSI 1. The touch probe returns to the set position in step 4.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to perform measurement for TOUCH POSI 2. When the measurement is
completed, the width computed from TOUCH POSI 1 and TOUCH POSI 2 is displayed at
DIFFER. LEVEL.
7 To use the measured level difference with the zero offset, locate the cursor to "X", "Y", "Z" of
ZERO OFFSET / No and press [F2] (ADD). Then, enter the measured level difference value.
The entered value is set in the WORK ZERO table.
6130-E P-274
5-4-7. Angle and center between two circles (ID and OD) measurement
Angle and center between two circles measurement is used to determine the angle formed by the
line that connects the centers of two circles and the X-axis by measuring the center position
between two circles (hole or cylinder).
Procedure :
the icon of angle and center between two circles from the measurement figures.
measurement).
ME61315R0300700140001
ME61315R0300700140002
6130-E P-275
measured circle is displayed at CIRCLE POSI 1. Perform measurement for CIRCLE POSI 2 in
the same manner as above.
ME61315R0300700140003
6 When the measurements for CIRCLE POSI 1 and CIRCLE POSI 2 are completed, the angle
and the pitch computed from CIRCLE POSI 1 and CIRCLE POSI 2 are displayed.
ME61315R0300700140004
by pressing the CAL function key. To set the line that connects CIRCLE POSI 1 and CIRCLE
POSI 2 to "0" degree, enter "0". The entered value is set in the WORK ZERO table.
6130-E P-276
5-4-8. Center between three circles (ID and OD) measurement

Center between three circles measurement is used to determine the center position (X, Y) and the
diameter (D) of the pitch circle from the center of three circles by measuring the center position
between three circles (hole or cylinder).
Procedure :
the icon of center between three circles from the measurement figures.
measurement).
ME61315R0300700270001
6130-E P-277
ME61315R0300700270002
and CIRCLE POSI 3 in the same manner as above.
ME61315R0300700270003
6130-E P-278
center position and the diameter of the pitch circle from three circle centers are displayed at
CENTER POSI, DIAM.
ME61315R0300700270004
measurement
Intersection and center between four circles measurement is used to determine the intersection
point (X, Y) of the lines by measuring the center position between four circles (hole or cylinder) and
by creating the lines from the centers of four circles that intersect each other.
Procedure :
the icon of level difference angle and center between four circles from the measurement
figures.
6130-E P-279
measurement).
ME61315R0300700280001
ME61315R0300700280002
through CIRCLE POSI 4 in the same manner as above.
ME61315R0300700280003
6130-E P-280
intersection point (X, Y) that formed by the lines come from the centers of four circle is
displayed at INTERSECTION.
ME61315R0300700280004
measured intersection position to "0", enter "0" to "X" and "Y" respectively. The entered value is
set in the WORK ZERO table.
5-4-10.Measurement result
For the detail of measurement result, refer to "4-3-10. Measurement result" in "SECTION 4
MANUAL GAUGING".
6130-E P-281
5-5. Tool Length Gauging

The tool length gauging function is used to measure the tool length offset value of machining tools.
There are two gauging cycles: "-Z" and "AUTO (-Z)". "-Z" is the cycle by manual operation, which is
performed after moving the axis to the upper part of the touch sensor. The axis returns to the original
position after contacting with the touch sensor.
The AUTO (-Z) cycle can be enabled by setting H.P.
By setting H.P., the axis moves to the top face of the touch sensor automatically, and then after the
Z-axis moves to contact with the touch sensor, the axis returns to the position set with H.P.
The Z-axis is selected by the manual feed axis selection for both "-Z" and "AUTO (-Z)".
In both cycles, manual operation including slide hold and spindle idle rotation during slide hold,
manual pulse, and rapid traverse are enabled. Use these operations with the tools that have no
cutters in the center part such as boring bar, milling, and end mill.
To restart operation after slide hold, press the START button.
Procedure :
TOOL DATA screen by pressing the "tool data setting" key.
ME61315R0300700150001
6130-E P-282
GAUGING MENU.
ME61315R0300700150002
5 Press the [F2] (TOOL LENGTH).
[Supplement]
tool length offset and WEAR OFFS is set to "0". When "wear offset" is selected, the value at
SHAP OFFSET of the tool length offset does not change and the increased or decreased
value of SHAP OFFSET is input to WEAR OFFS.
ME61315R0300700150003
7 As the cursor moves to SELECT CYCLE, select the function keys "-Z" and "AUTO(-Z)".
“AUTO (-Z)” is enabled by setting the home position. When “-Z” is selected, go to step 8. When
“AUTO (-Z)” is selected, go to step 10.
[Supplement]
How to set H.P.

Position the axis to X, Y, and Z positions where no interference will occur with ATC
operation, and press the function key [F4] (H.P.).
The position set with H.P. will not be backed up when the power is shut off. Set H.P each
time after the power is cycled.
6130-E P-283
8 When "-Z" is selected, locate the cursor to TOOL-L OFST NO. to which measurement result is
entered. Position the tool edge to a position close to the touch sensor and press the START
button.
[Supplement]
When setting the tool length offset no. to other than HA, HB and HC, locate the cursor to
TOOL-L OFSET NO. to enter a desired no.
9 When the tool contacts with the touch sensor, the tool length offset value is automatically input
and then the Z-axis is raised. Go to step 12.
10 When AUTO(-Z) is selected, the axis moves automatically from the position set with H.P. by
pressing the START button.
11 When the tool contacts with the touch sensor, the tool length offset value is automatically input
and the axis automatically returns to the position set with H.P.
6130-E P-284
5-6. NC parameters
(1) Set whether or not the automatic zero setting is performed when executing the workpiece
gauging cycle in interactive measurement.
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46, bit 7
1: Automatic zero setting is carried out.
0: Only gauging is carried out.
(2) Set the unit system used for the display and parameter setting.
NC optional parameter bit No. 9
Bit No. Contents SET 1 SET 0 Factory Set Initial Value
In data setting, unit system of length is either “inch”
0 Inch mm 0
or “mm”.
In data setting unit is either minimum setting unit or 1 mm, Minimu
1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec. 1 inch, m
1 1
1 deg, setting
1 sec unit
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
In the data setting, the decimal point indicates 1 Basic bit 1
6 0
mm, 1 inch, 1 deg and 1 sec. unit setting
7 0
6130-E P-285
5-7. Error
5-7-1. Error List
Error Description
5361 This error occurs when the input data no. is "0" in specification of the
Zero set input NO zero offset no.
Tool length offset input NO. specification of the tool length offset no.
5209 The error occurs in either of the following cases.
Input data overflow [Tool length measurement parameter]
specification of the maximum travel distance to the contact
position.
specification of the maximum tool length to the contact position.
The error occurs in any of the following cases.

[Workpiece measurement ]
(1) In specification of the zero offset no., the input data no. exceeds
the number of workpiece coordinate system sets prepared for the
user.
a. The zero offset no. is 201 or larger when the number of
b. The zero offset no. is 101 or larger when the number of
c. The zero offset no. is 51 or larger when the number of
d. The zero offset no. is 21 or larger when the number of

[Tool length measurement ]
In specification of the tool length offset no., the input data no.
exceeds the number of tool sets (999).
The FIND function except specification of the zero offset no.
for a numerals impossible.
6130-E P-286
SECTION 6 CONTINUOUS TOOL GAUGING FUNCTION
6-1. Overview
The continuous tool gauging function is the function that allows multiple tools to be gauged
continuously and automatically.
The following two kinds of gauging are possible with continuous tool gauging.
 Tool length gauging (Z-axis direction)
 Tool breakage detection (Z-axis direction)
Multiple tools are used in machining processes. If the tool length offset and the tool breakage
detection are conducted to each of all tools respectively, it will take a lot of time. Using this function
enables this sequence to be conducted in an automatic manner, allowing tools stored in the pot to
be gauged continuously.
[Supplement]
The continuous tool gauging function does not cover gauging in the following cases: tool diameter
gauging, in a direction other than Z, by non-contact type sensor, and gauging of turning tools.
This function also does not cover double-column machining centers and the BLADE T400.
6130-E P-287
6-2. Gauging Flow
Generally this is set only once at the time when the machine
is installed.
(If the gauging system with high accuracy is required,
however, setting the home position at regular intervals is
recommended.)
Setting the home position * See "1-2-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point" in
of touch sensor "GAUGING SYSTEMS INSTRUCTION MANUAL".
Preparation for gauging
When a tool is changed in the magazine, the data is

changed in the pot/tool correspondence table in the
MAGAZINE INFO sheet in the TOOL DATA screen.
Setting the tool * See "1-2-2. Setting the Pot No./Tool No. Table" in
correspondence table "GAUGING SYSTEMS INSTRUCTION MANUAL".
Set the required parameters by selecting the tool to be

gauged in the CONTINUOUS GAUGING window.
Parameter setting in the The default values are set initially for the parameters.
CONTINUOUS GAUGING window * See "Function explanation" in this manual.
The selected tools are gauged in order in the

CONTINUOUS GAUGING window.
Gauging
Tool offset in continuous The gauging mode is "tool length offset".

tool gauging * See "6-3. Operation Flow".
The workpiece is cut.

Machining
The selected tools are checked for tool breakage detection

in order in the CONTINUOUS GAUGING window.
Gauging
The gauging mode is "tool breakage detection".

Tool breakage detection in This is executed when the tool length offset value is set in
continuous tool gauging advance.
* See "6-3. Operation Flow".
ME61315R0300800020001
6130-E P-288
6-3. Operation Flow

Continuous tool gauging is performed in the following procedure.
Procedure :
1 Open the TOOL DATA screen in MDI mode.
2 Open the MAGAZINE INFO. sheet.
3 Press [F6] (TOOL GAUGING).
ME61315R0300800030001
4 Open the TOOL GAUGING MENU window. Press [F6] (CON. GAU.).
ME61315R0300800030002
6130-E P-289
[Supplement]
The screen image above is the one with "manual gauging"; the screen image with "IGF
gauging" is different.
5 Open the CONTINUOUS GAUGING popup window.
ME61315R0300800030003
6 Set the parameters.

For details, refer to "6-4. Function Explanation".
[Supplement]
When gauging a tool with which the gauging position is not the tool rotation center, such as
boring bars, end mills, or milling cutters, set the parameters "SHIT (X)", "SHIFT (Y)" and "S
ORIENT". Then the gauging is performed by shifting the position for the amount set in the
parameter.
6130-E P-290
7 Press [F4] (GAUGING START).

→ The [F4] (GAUGING START) key cannot be pressed in AUTO or MANUAL operation
mode.
→ The [F4] (GAUGING START) key cannot be pressed if no tool with "G" exists.
ME61315R0300800030004
8 Select gauging operation.

→ Select whether the gauging operation is stopped once before approaching to the sensor
or not by the following function keys.
[F6] (YES) : Select YES to make an approach movement to the sensor by manual
operation in checking the tool to be gauged separately or in gauging
of tools of which gauging position is not the tool rotation center such
as boring bars, end mills, and milling cutters.
After the temporary stop of gauging operation, press the manual
interruption button to make an approach movement by manual
operation as required.
The gauging operation is resumed by pressing the start button.
[F7] (NO) : Select NO when performing the gauging without stopping.
[F8] (CANCEL) : Close the GAUGING OPERATION SELECTION window.
→ After gauging operation is selected, the function keys other than CLOSE will be disabled.
→ After gauging operation is selected, the tool list is filtered to the tools marked with "G".
6130-E P-291
ME61315R0300800030005
[Supplement]
To enable the function keys, either "termination of continuous tool gauging" or "reset" is
necessary.
To release the filtering of tool list, either perform "cancel of filtering" or open the
"CONTINUOUS GAUGING window" with "continuous tool gauging terminated" or "reset".
9 Press the "Start" button.
10 Then continuous tool gauging is started.

6130-E P-292
6-4. Function Explanation
6-4-1. CONTINUOUS GAUGING window
TOOL LEN OFST

sheet
ME61315R0300800040001
MEAS. POSI. sheet
ME61315R0300800040002
LEVEL sheet
ME61315R0300800040003
6130-E P-293
DISP. TYPE
Displays the tool type displayed in the current tool list.
The displayed items are changed according to the tool filtering event. For the details of filtering, refer
to "6-4-3. FILTERING popup window".
MEAS. NUM
Displays the number of tools to be gauged.
The denominator displays the number of tools to be gauged and the tools finished with gauging.
The numerator displays the number of tools finished with gauging.
OPER. MODE
It is possible to switch the operation mode between TOOL LENGTH (tool length offset) and BREAK
DETECTION (automatic tool breakage detection).
Choose the option using the function key before starting continuous tool gauging.
Example:
[F1] (Menu) → [F2] (TOOL LENGTH)
[F1] (Menu) → [F3] (tool breakage detection)
ME61315R0300800040004
[Supplement]
If the continuous tool gauging function is executed after changing the operation mode, system
variable VFST bit 0 changes. To perform gauging with a program next time (such as CALLOO30),
pay attention to VFST state.
GAUGING
Tools to be gauged are set. Refer to Table 1 Tool gauging status below for gauging status. To
change the gauging status, use the function keys.
By pressing [F1] (CHECK), the gauging status of the tool in the line of cursor is changed.
By pressing [F2] (ALL ITEM CHECK), the gauging status of all tools gauging are changed.
[Supplement]
Changing rule of gauging status

The status "(blank)" or "F" is changed to "G".
The status "G" is changed to "(blank)".
(Blank) Continuous tool gauging is not performed.

G Continuous tool gauging is performed.
F Continuous tool gauging is completed.
Table 1 Tool gauging status
[Supplement]
The background color of gauging status "F" changes according to the gauging result status.
Normal gauging ... yellow
Tool breakage ... red
6130-E P-294
T.NO.
Displays the tool number.
POT
Displays the pot number in which the tool is inserted.
KIND
Displays the tool kind.
OK/NG
Displays the tool life state.
[Supplement]
This is not displayed if the tool life management function is not available.
If an NG tool is to be gauged, continuous tool gauging is not started.
HNO.
The tool length offset number is set.
The setting range is "1 to 999, A, B, C".
Continuous tool gauging cannot be started if the tool length offset number is duplicated with the
number of other tools.
Setting of ANT. TOOL-L

Set the anticipated length of a tool when performing automatic tool length offset.
If EMPTY is set, the minimum tool length is set automatically.
[Supplement]
The minimum tool length varies depending on the tool length offset method.
 When the tool length offset method is "absolute": optional parameter long word No.43
 When the tool length offset method is "relative": optional parameter long word No.43-
reference tool length
* Although the value varies depending on the machine model, the reference tool length is either
"150 mm (5.91 in.)" or "200 mm (7.87 in.)".
When the spindle moves toward the touch sensor, the spindle goes to the position of "anticipated
tool length + safety distance" from the touch sensor.
Anticipated
tool length
Safety distance
Sensor
ME61315R0300800040005
Fig.6-1 Anticipated tool length

6130-E P-295
[Supplement]
When the operation mode is "TOOL LENGTH": safety distance = 10 mm (0.39 in.)
When the operation mode is "BREAKAGE DETECTION": safety distance = 5 mm (0.20 in.)
6130-E P-296
SHIFT (X)
Set a rough shift amount from the tool center of the nose in the X direction. The value can be a
positive or negative value.
 When the X-axis and the Y-axis moves to the touch sensor center in an automatic tool length
offset or automatic tool breakage detection cycle, position the axis to the position shifted by
SHIFT (X) so that the tool nose comes to the sensor center.
The distance from the sensor home position can be set by using [F3] (CAL).
[Supplement]
The touch sensor tends to approach around the travel limit. Therefore carefully set SHIFT (X)
while paying attention to the travel limit.
SHIFT (Y)
Set a rough shift amount from the tool center of the nose in the Y direction.
The other settings are the same with SHIFT (X).
S ORIENT
When a special tool such as a boring bar is used, the tool may not be touched to the touch sensor
with spindle indexing of a given direction.
At a time like this, index the spindle at an angle that allows the tool nose to touch the touch sensor
by setting S ORIENT.
Example: The tool nose touches the touch sensor by specifying 270° in S ORIENT
in the following case.
Tool
Sensor
Execute the travel by setting 270°in S ORIENT.
Tool
Sensor
ME61315R0300800040006
Fig.6-2 Spindle Orientation

6130-E P-297
Length determination value

Set the tool breakage determination value in an absolute value.
 Length determination value <|(tool length offset value)-(gauged tool length)|
When the formula above is met, it is determined as 'tool breakage'.
 If Empty is set for length determination value in tool breakage detection, 0.1 mm is set as the
length determination value.
ACT POS
Displays the actual position based on the sensor home position.
Guide message
The message gives an explanation about the parameter at the cursor position and about the
operation after pressing [F4] (GAUGING START).
6-4-2. GAUGING PARAM window

The information required for continuous tool gauging is set.
Since the parameters of the continuous gauging function are set in the system, they don't have to be
set again for the next time, after set once.
Operation using GAUGING PARAM popup window
ME61315R0300800050001
Fig.6-3 GAUGING PARAM popup window (CONTINUOUS GAUGING)
Press [F7] (GAUGING PARAM.) to display the GAUGING PARAM popup window.
SET GAUGING BY TOOL INSERTION

The SET GAUGING BY TOOL INSERTION parameter controls the operation as follows.
DOES: Allows the inserted tool to be gauged automatically.
DOES NOT: Does not allow the inserted tool to be gauged automatically.
6130-E P-298
TOOL OFFSET METHOD

The TOOL OFFSET METHOD parameter indicates the tool length offset method currently set. To
change the tool length offset method, change VFST bit7 by the program command.
System variable VFST is backed up in the NC memory. IT does not have to be set each time tool
length offset/tool breakage detection is performed.
Bit number Setting value Content

0 to 6 These bits are not used with this function. Refer to the following item.
INSTRUCTION MANUAL: GAUGING SYSTEMS, 1-2-3. Reference
7 0 The tool length offset value is specified with the relative offset
method.
1 The tool length offset value is specified with the absolute offset
method.
[Supplement]
Check that the method is the same as used in home position setting.
 RELATIVE
This is the method to specify the tool length offset value by the length relative to the reference
tool (a in Fig. 6-4).
 ABSOLUTE
This is the method to specify the tool length offset value by the tool length from the spindle end
face (b in Fig. 6-4).
Reference tool
Spindle end face
ME61315R0300800050002
Fig.6-4 Offset method

6130-E P-299
Setting of SPEED TO SAFETY POSI., 1st APPROACH SPEED, 2nd APPROACH SPEED
Feedrate to the
safety position Anticipated
tool length
Approach speed 1
Safety distance
Approach speed 2
Sensor
ME61315R0300800050003
Fig.6-5 Feedrate
Specify the approach speed in moving to the sensor.
Parameter Target Speed when EMPTY

SPEED TO SAFETY Feedrate from the sensor to the safety 2000 mm/min (78.74 ipm)
POSI. distance.
Offset: safety distance = 10 mm (0.39 in.)
Breakage: safety distance = 5 mm (0.20
in.)
1st APPROACH 1st approach speed 1000 mm/min (39.37 ipm)
SPEED * 1st approach to the sensor.
2nd APPROACH 2nd approach speed 480 mm/min (18.90 ipm)
SPEED * 2nd approach to the sensor.
[Supplement]
When the operation mode is set to "tool length offset", "approach speed 1 (1st)" and "approach
speed 2 (2nd)" are used.
When the operation mode is set to "tool breakage detection", "approach speed 2" is used.
6130-E P-300
6-4-3. FILTERING popup window

The tool list setting displayed in the CONTINUOUS GAUGING window is displayed.
If no item is checked, the result will be the same as when ALL is checked.
Operation using FILTERING popup window

Press [F5] (FILTER) to display the FILTERING popup window.
ME61315R0300800060001
Fig.6-6 FILTERING popup window (CONTINUOUS GAUGING)
TOOL GEOMETRY
The tool geometry to be filtered is specified.
GAUGING
The gauging condition to be filtered is specified.
TOOL LIFE
The tool life to be filtered is specified.
6130-E P-301
6-4-4. SORT screen

Operation using SORT screen
Press [F6] (SORT) to display the SORT screen.
ME61315R0300800070001
Fig.6-7 SORT screen (CONTINUOUS GAUGING)
[F1] (T. NO. (UP))

The tool number list is sorted in ascending order.
[F2] (T. NO. (DOWN))

The tool number list is sorted in descending sort.
[F3] (POT NO. (UP))

The pot number list is sorted in ascending order.
[F4] (POT NO. (DOWN))

The pot number list is sorted in descending sort.
6130-E P-302
6-5. Operation of tool length offset
ME61315R0300800080001
Procedure :
1 Check that the operation status is MDI.
2 Check that the operation mode is "TOOL LENGTH".
4 Select the gauging operation.

→ The continuous tool list is filtered only to "gauging tool", and the function keys are disabled
except for [F8] (CLOSE).
5 Press the Start button.
6 'Continuous tool gauging - tool length offset' is started.

6130-E P-303
Machine behavior
The operations with automatic tool length offset in the Z direction are as follows.
(1) The first tool is attached to the spindle by the ATC.
(2) The Z-axis moves to the positive limit at a rapid traverse rate.
(3) The spindle is indexed.
(4) The X-axis and the Y-axis moves at a rapid traverse rate so that the tool nose comes to the
For tools of which the tool nose is not located at the spindle center, refer to "6-4-1.
CONTINUOUS GAUGING Window".
(5) If YES is selected in the GAUGING OPERATION SELECTION window, the operation stops
here temporarily. Make an approach movement to the sensor as needed basis by manual
operation in the manual interruption mode.
Then press the start button to resume gauging.
If NO is selected, the operation does not stop here.
(6) The Z-axis moves at the rapid "approach speed 1" until the tool touches the touch sensor.
(7) The Z-axis stops when the tool touches the touch sensor.
(8) The Z-axis returns a few millimeters at a rapid traverse rate.
(9) The Z-axis moves at "approach speed 2" again to allow the tool to touch the touch sensor.
(10) The Z-axis stops when the tool touches the touch sensor.
The result is stored to the tool length offset number which is the same as the tool number of the
current tool.
(11) The tool to be gauged next is attached to the spindle by the ATC.
(12) Steps (2) to (11) are repeated.
(13) Gauging is finished when the last tool is gauged.

6130-E P-304
6-6. Operation of tool breakage detection
ME61315R0300800090001
Procedure :
1 Check that the operation status is MDI.
2 Check that the operation mode is "BREAKAGE DETECTION".
4 Select the gauging operation.

→The continuous tool list is filtered only to "gauging tool", and the function keys are disabled
except for [F8] (CLOSE).
5 Press the Start button.
6 'Continuous tool gauging -tool breakage detection' is started.

6130-E P-305
Machine behavior
The operations with automatic tool breakage detection in the Z direction are as follows.
(1) The first tool is attached to the spindle by the ATC.
(3) The spindle is indexed.
(4) The X-axis and the Y-axis moves at a rapid traverse rate so that the tool nose comes to the
For tools of which the tool nose is not located at the spindle center, refer to "6-4-1.
CONTINUOUS GAUGING Window".
(5) If YES is selected in the GAUGING OPERATION SELECTION window, the operation stops
here temporarily. Make an approach movement to the sensor as needed basis by manual
operation in the manual interruption mode.
Then press the start button to resume gauging.
If NO is selected, the operation does not stop here.
(6) The tool nose moves to the position where the safety distance (5 mm (0.20 in.)) is kept from the
touch sensor at a rapid traverse rate.
[Supplement]
If the check-mark of NC optional parameter Bit No. 74 bit 4 is checked, the "moves at a rapid
traverse rate" is changed to "moves at a rate applied to the safety position".
(7) The axis moves at "approach speed 2" toward the position exceeding the position where the
tool nose touches the touch sensor by 10 mm (0.39 in.).
 When no breakage is found or the breakage amount is less than 10 mm (0.39 in.)
The tool nose touches the touch sensor to be stopped.
In this case, the tool length is computed out using the touched position data to be stored
temporarily.
 When the breakage amount is larger than 10 mm (0.39 in.):

The tool nose does not touch the touch sensor.
(9) The tool to be gauged next is attached to the spindle by the ATC.
(10) Steps (2) to (9) are repeated.
(11) Gauging is finished when the last tool is gauged.

6130-E P-306
6-7. Precautions
 The continuous tool gauging function is performed with gauging program OO30 described in
the document.
Be careful as gauging operation by OO30 is performed even when a gauging program other
than OO30 is used.
When the continuous tool gauging function is used while using a gauging program other than
OO30, carry out the operation starting from the setting of touch sensor zero point. (Refer to "1-
2-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point".)
 Continuous tool gauging is disabled under the following conditions.

Machine lock is ON.
The slope coordinate is valid.
6-8. Error
5503 Continuation gauging condition error
The gauging start conditions with continuous gauging are not met.
[Index]
None
[Code]
1XXXX
XXXX: Displays the decimal number of the duplicated tool length offset number.
2XXXX
XXXX: Displays the pot number to which a tool that cannot be gauged is inserted.
(The pot number of the current tool is "0".)
[Probable Faulty Locations]
The offset number is duplicated to another gauging tool.
A tool with which life is not "OK" is set as the gauging target.
6130-E P-307
SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION
SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING

FUNCTION
7-1. What is Non-contact Sensor?

The non-contact sensor uses a laser beam for measurement unlike existing sensors with
mechanical or electric contacts. This optical sensor, by taking advantages of a non-contact sensor,
can gauge even a rotating tool, which used to be impossible for the existing sensors. The sensor
can increase the gauging speed, and can gauge sphericity by taking the advantage of a linear
sensor. However, this sensor is tended for linear gauging and can not gauge the maximum length
(or radial) of an irregular shaped tool depending on the sensor position. Scanning gauging* makes
up this disadvantage. This gauging method permits gauging of a rotating tool or gauging while
searching the maximum length.
ME61315R0300900010001
* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the Y-axis) and shifts
along the axis at right angles with the gauging axis (e.g. the Z-axis). By repeating the above
gauging several times, the sensor determines the maximum tool length (or diameter).
6130-E P-308
7-2. Outline
Non-contact sensor gauging is roughly classified into two methods according to the position where
the sensor is installed: gauging with a fixed sensor and gauging with a movable one. A fixed sensor
can gauge a horizontal spindle tool (an attachment tool). But a movable sensor can gauge only a
vertical spindle tool.
Movable sensor for gauging a vertical spindle tool
Fixed sensor for gauging a vertical spindle tool or horizontal spindle tool
ME61315R0300900020001
The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST.
Bit 3 of VFST 0 ...... Movable sensor
1 ...... Fixed sensor
The tool-gauging program consists of the following maker’s subprograms:
 Preparation program for gauging
 Gauging program
 Tool breakage detection program
Programs classified by the sensor position are described on the following pages.
6130-E P-309
7-3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode

As mentioned earlier, the sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-
variable VFST. When selecting the movable sensor mode, turn off bit 3 of the variable.
ME61315R0300900030001
When using a movable sensor, the sensor position can be set with bits 0 and 1 of NC optional
parameter No. 72. Four positions are available as shown in the figure below, and the moving axis
and the approach direction are different among the four positions.
2 0
Y+
3
X+
Default position
ME61315R0300900030002
NC optional parameter bit No.

Sensor 72 Approach direction
position
Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 Negative X-axis direction → Positive X-axis direction
1 0 1 Negative Y-axis direction → Positive Y-axis direction
2 1 0 Positive X-axis direction → Negative X-axis direction
3 1 1 Positive Y-axis direction → Negative Y-axis direction
6130-E P-310
[List of gauging preparation cycle]

OO31 Position setting cycle for tool change
OO33 Position setting cycle for Y-axis retract
OO93 Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction
OO94 Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction
[List of gauging cycle]
OO95 Gauging in the lengthwise direction
OO96 Gauging in the radial direction
OO99 Gauging the sphericity
[List of tool breakage detection cycle]
OO95 Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction
OO96 Tool breakage detection in the radial direction
OO97 High-speed tool breakage detection
[Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)]
On the machine of which tool change function is set at ON (bit 0 of NC specification code
No.21 is turned on), the NC performs tool change by transferring the argument PGO=2 on
detection of tool breakage. The cycle sets the tool change position used for that purpose.
The tool change position is stored in the system-work coordinates No.2.
For details, refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL
BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”.
CALL OO31
[Y-axis retract position setting cycle (OO33)]
In some machines, the sensor may interfere with the Y-axis when it advances or retracts.
If interference is anticipated, move the Y-axis to its retract position before advancing or
retracting the sensor. If necessary, refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET
/ AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION”.
CALL OO33
[Spindle speed]
When performing gauging while rotating the spindle, specify the spindle speed by referring to
the speed obtained by the following formula:
S=F/N
Here,
S means the actual spindle speed. This is the S command value multiplied by the spindle
speed override.
F is the actual feedrate. If PF1 (the 1st approach speed of the sensor) is not specified with an
argument, this value is 2,000 multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. If PF1 is specified
with an argument, this value is the specified value multiplied by the cutting feedrate override.
N is the number of tool blades.
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction (OO93)]
This cycle determines the sensor position used to gauge the tool length and detect tool
breakage.
The offset method can be switched by bit 7 of VFST.
Bit 7 of VFST OFF : Relatively position offset
ON : Absolutely position offset
Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here. The gauging results are
stored in the system-work coordinates No.20.
6130-E P-311
 Calling sequence
CALL OO93 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*]
[PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: the X-axis, bit1: the Y-axis, bit2: Z-axis)
When the sensor position is 0 or 2, set PAXI at #06H. When a movable sensor is
used, the sensor and the tool may interfere with each other and the machine will
consequently get damaged if the Y-axis position is not set.
When the sensor position is 1 or 3, set PAXI at #05H. When a movable sensor is
used, the sensor and the tool may interfere with each other and the machine will
consequently get damaged if the X-axis position is not set.
PLI: Reference tool length
For the absolute position offset (as mentioned earlier), specify the length from the
gauge line to the end of the reference tool. For the relative position offset, specify
the difference between the reference tool length for relative position offset and
the reference tool length used for individual gauging. If they are the same, just
specify 0.
PRS: Spindle orientation position
If PRS is omitted and an M code for spindle rotation (M03 or M04) is specified,
the tool is measured while in rotation. When PRS is specified, the spindle is
orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool. Without the above M
code, however, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped
tool even if PRS is omitted.
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning]
Specify the width of gauging in one direction. In scanning gauging, the sensor
measures the tool in both positive and negative directions. Without designation of
PSPN, the sensor cannot gauge the tool. The default pick feed for gauging is 0.1
mm (0.004 in.). Scanning gauging is intended for determining the maximum tool
length position.
When the measured value decreased, it is assumed that the subsequent gauging
data will no more in crease. This means the sensor does not need to continue
gauging before it covers the width of PSPN. The criterion for stopping gauging is
called skip value. The default is 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.).
ME61315R0300900030003
6130-E P-312
PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.))

POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.))
PAT: Attachment offset number
Set the offset amount to VATSC [185, attachment offset number]. Use this number
when performing the sensor zero setting cycle using an attachment. The movable
sensor cannot gauge a horizontal tool. Therefore, this number applies only to the
gauging on extension attachments.
PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter*
Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging
cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify “1” for PCON.
PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter*
Usually the sensor retracts after gauging. To hold the sensor position after gauging,
specify “1” for PRET.
* When “1” is set at the Z-axis retract inhibiting parameter, “1” is automatically set
also at the sensor retraction inhibiting parameter. This is because the sensor
interferes with a machine component when it advances or retracts depending on
the axis position or the machine.
PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor
PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor
PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle
PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle
Usually, the tool approaches the sensor four times. In scanning gauging, the tool
approaches the sensor twice. Here, specify the approach speed at that time. The
default speed is 2,000 mm/min (78.74 ipm), 1,000 mm/min (39.37 ipm), 100 mm/
min (3.94 ipm), and 3 mm/min (0.12 ipm) respectively. In the case of gauging of a
rotating tool, the 4th approach speed depends on rotation speed (0.001 x S [mm]/
min).
PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow(3 [s] by default)
 Gauging operation
1. Install the reference tool.
2. Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)
3. Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)
4. Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor
works by Z-axis movement)
5. Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.
6130-E P-313
 Cycle operation
1. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.
2. The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of
Y-axis before gauging.
3. Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.
4. The sensor advances.
5. The Y-axis is positioned.
6. The X-axis is positioned.
7. The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.
8. The laser shutter opens.
9. Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)
10. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.
11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected.
12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.*
13. The laser shutter closes.
14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.*
15. The sensor retracts.*
* Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is
specified.
Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO94)]

This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting tool
breakage.
The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No.20.
CALL OO94 PAXI=* PRI=* PLI=* [PIN=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*]
[POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: X-axis, bit1: Y-axis, and bit2: Z-axis)
When the sensor position is 0 or 2, set PAXI at #01H.
When the sensor position is 1 or 3, set PAXI at #02H.
PRI: Reference tool radial
Specify the cutter radius of the reference tool.
Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction.
PIN: Z-axis infeed amount
When the sensor zero setting cycle is executed, the sensor starts gauging by
shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified
with PIN.
6130-E P-314

* Points to be noted in the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction
also apply to this parameter.
PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor
PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor
PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle
PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle
PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)
works by Y-axis or X-axis movement.
 Cycle operation
Y-axis before gauging.*3
5. The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position.*2
6. The X-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.*2
7. The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-
axis shifts from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with
PIN.)
10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position.*2
14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.*, *3
specified.
6130-E P-315
*2 When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), the Y-axis
moves instead of the X-axis in the above steps 6 and 10, and the X-axis moves instead
of Y-axis in the above step 5.
*3 When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), Y-axis retraction
does not take place.
[Gauging in the lengthwise direction]

This cycle gauges the tool length. When gauging the tool length, turn on bit 0 of the system-
variable VFST.
CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
[PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*]
[PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*]
PLI: Tool length
Specify the (expected) tool length.
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]:Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning]
An offset must be set at VATSC [185, attachment offset designation number]. Use
this setting for executing a sensor zero setting cycle using an attachment. It is
also necessary to match the attachment number with the attachment offset
number. Set attachment rotation offset numbers (G181 to G185) to the
attachment in ascending order.
Example:
T301: Offset number 1 (PAT = 1 at this time)
:
:
When a movable sensor is used, horizontal tools cannot be measured. In this
case, only gauging using an extension attachment is available.
PH: Tool length offset number
Specify the tool length offset number where the gauged tool length is stored.
When PH is omitted, the active tool offset number (VTLCN) is set.
6130-E P-316
PSAM: The number of gauging times.
If PSAM is set to 2 or more, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the set number
of times.
For the 1st gauging, the NC performs normal gauging (with 4 times of approach).
For the 2nd and later gauging cycles, the NC performs gauging by 2 times of
approach to the sensor. The approaching speeds in the 2nd and later gauging
cycles are as follows:
1st approach ... The 3rd approach speed in the normal gauging cycle
2nd approach ... The 4th approach speed in the normal gauging cycle
The average value obtained by several times of gauging is regarded as the final
measured value.
The 2nd and later gauging cycles do not include the scanning gauging.
The default is 3 (times).
PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements
The maximum and the minimum values are obtained from the results of several
times of gauging. Set the allowable range of the difference between the maximum
and minimum measurements (variation) at this parameter. The default is 0.005
[mm] (0.00020 in.).
PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm)
Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range causes an alarm or not.
Set “1” if you want an alarm to be generated. Set “0” if not. The default is “0” (no
alarm).
PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry).
Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range triggers another gauging
cycle or not. When retry is desired, set the number of retry times at PRTY.
If retry is not desired, set “0” at PRTY.
The NC performs gauging by the number of times set at PSAM (number of
gauging times) for each retry gauging. During the retry gauging, two times of
approach is made even in the 1st gauging cycle.
If the variation does not fall within the allowable range after the specified number
of retrials, an alarm occurs.
If PSRA is set to “1”, the PRTY value is ignored. If “0” is set at both PSRA and
PRTY, the average value is regarded as the measured value even when the
variation is out of the allowable range. The default is “0” (no retry).
6130-E P-317
 Cycle operation
5. The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.
6. The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.
11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the
specified number of times.
specified.
6130-E P-318
[Gauging in the radial direction]

This cycle gauges the cutter radius. When gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the
system-variable VFST.
CALL OO96 PRI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
[PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*]
PLI: Tool length
Specify the offset amount of the tool length.
PRI: Cutter radius
Specify the offset amount of the cutter radius (: the expected offset amount of the
cutter radius).
The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative
direction by a distance specified with PIN.
Refer to the Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction.
PD: Cutter radius compensation number
Specify the cutter radius compensation number where is stored the gauged cutter
radius.
When omitted, the active tool compensation number (VTLCN) is set.
PSAM: The number of gauging times
Refer to the Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.
PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry)
6130-E P-319
 Cycle operation
5. The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.*2
6. The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.*2
7. The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the sensor
position shift sin infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
specified.
moves instead of the Y-axis in the above steps 6, 10, 13, and the X-axis moves instead of
X-axis in the above step 5.
6130-E P-320
[Gauging the sphericity (OO99)]

This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of ball end mill.
CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*] [PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PH: Tool management number
Specify the tool management number where the tool length offset amount and the
cutter radius compensation amount are stored for judgment of sphericity. When
PH is omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set.
PLI: Tool length
Specify the tool length. When omitted, the offset amount of the tool management
number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
Specify the cutter radius. When omitted, the compensation amount of the tool
management number is set.
PRA: The angle added for gauging sphericity
The sensor gauges the sphericity from the length wise direction to the radial
direction.
Specify the incremental angle used for this gauging. The angle must be 5° or over
and a divisor of 90°. Default is 15°.
PRE: Maximum allowable error
When the error in the sphericity gauging exceeds this amount, an alarm occurs.
When PRE is not specified, the cycle does not judge the errors.
6130-E P-321
 Cycle operation
6. The X-axis is positioned.*2
8. Gauging cycle starts.(Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)
9. The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.*2
10. The PRA angle is added and the sensor gauges sphericity in the slanting direction.
11. Operation sequences No.9 and 10 are repeated up to the gauging angle of 90°.
12. The X-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position.*2
13. The sensor gauges in the radial direction.
18. The sphericity is judged, if the judgment command is specified.
specified.
moves instead of the Y-axis in the above steps 6, 9, 12, and the Y-axis moves instead of
6130-E P-322
[Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction]

This cycle detect the tool breakage in the lengthwise direction. When the breakage detection
in the lengthwise direction, turnoff bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.
CALL OO95 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
[PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
Specify the tool length (: the expected tool length).
Specify the tool length offset number of which data is compared with the gauging
result.
When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set.
PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage
PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage.
1
PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. The broken tool moves
2 to the tool change position before being changed.
If PGO is omitted, the cycle ends with alarm occurrence.
PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage
Specify the threshold value for judging tool breakage as a difference from the tool
offset value. Default is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.).
PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear
Specify the threshold value for judging tool wear as a difference from the tool
offset value. When the difference is less than PLE2, the NC judges that the tool is
worn and up dates the tool length offset amount. If PLE2 is omitted, the NC does
not make this judgment.
6130-E P-323

 Cycle operation
17. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged.
18. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting.
specified.
6130-E P-324
[Tool breakage detection in the radial direction]

This cycle detects the tool breakage in the radial direction. For the breakage detection in the
radial direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.
CALL OO96 [PRI=*] [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
[PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
The cutter radius is compared with this value.
When omitted, the data of the active tool number (VTLCN) is set.
Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the tool
6130-E P-325
 Cycle operation
7. The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts
in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position.
specified.
moves instead of the X-axis in the above steps 6, 10, 13, and the Y-axis moves instead of
6130-E P-326
[High-speed tool breakage detection]

This cycle detects the tool length breakage.The high-speed tool breakage detection is
executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the sensor beam as shown
in the right figure.
This cycle, however, may not be able to detects light tool breakage.
ME61315R0300900030004
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
Specify the tool length offset amount. When omitted, the value specified with the
offset number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
Specify the cutter radius compensation amount. When omitted, the value specified
with the offset number is set.
direction by a distance specified with PIN. (Default: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.))
Specify the tool off set number. When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is
set.
6130-E P-327
 Cycle operation
9. The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).*2
14. The tool breakage is judged.
specified.
moves instead of Y-axis in the above steps 6 and 9, and the Y-axis moves instead of X-
axis in the above step 5.
6130-E P-328
7-4. Maker’s Subprogram in the Fixed Sensor Mode

The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST. When
selecting the fixed sensor mode, turn on bit 3 of the variable.
A fixed sensor can gauge a horizontal spindle tool (an attachment tool) or a vertical spindle tool. The
sensor mode (horizontal/vertical) can be switched by bit 6 of the system-variable VFST. For gauging
a horizontal spindle tool, turn on bit 6 of the variable.
The gauging cycles for vertical and horizontal spindle tools are described below:
ME61315R0300900040001
6130-E P-329
7-5. Maker’s Subprogram for Gauging a Vertical Spindle Tool

in the Fixed Sensor Mode
Like the gauging program for the movable sensor, the program for gauging a vertical spindle tool by
the fixed sensor consists of the following subroutines:
OO33 Position setting cycle for Y- axis retract
OO93 Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction
OO95 Gauging in the length wise direction
OO95 Tool breakage detection in the length wise direction
Refer to “6-3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode” [Tool change position setting
cycle (OO31)].
[Y- axis retract position setting cycle (OO33)]
Refer to “6-3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode” [Y- axis retract position
setting cycle (OO33)]
[Spindle speed]
S=F/N
Here,
speed override.
Additionally, when PF1 is specified with an argument, this is a value calculated by multiplying
the commanded value by the cutting feedrate override.
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction (OO93)]
breakage.
6130-E P-330
Normal setting data is PAXI=#04H.
Refer to 7-3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode.
4. Locate the tool near the sensor by hand.(Locate the tool in a position where the sensor
6130-E P-331
 Cycle operation
* Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No. 12 is omitted when PCON is
specified.
6130-E P-332

breakage.
[POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
Normal setting is #02H.
PRI: Reference cutter radius
Refer to “6-3. Maker’s Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode”.
works by Y-axis movement)
6130-E P-333
 Cycle operation
5. The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position.
6. The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.
axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
10. The Y-axis moves to the sensor position.
specified.
6130-E P-334
[Gauging in the length wise direction]

variable VFST.
PLI: Tool length
6130-E P-335
 Cycle operation
specified.
6130-E P-336

This cycle gauges the cutter radius. For gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the system-
variable VFST.
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
6130-E P-337
 Cycle operation
specified.
6130-E P-338

This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of a ball end mill.
CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*]
PH: Tool length offset number, Cutter radius compensation number
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
PRE: Detected error
6130-E P-339
 Cycle operation
9. The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.
12. The X-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position.
specified.
6130-E P-340
[Tool breakage detection in the length wise direction]

This cycle detect the tool breakage in the length wise direction. For the breakage detection in
the lengthwise direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.
CALL OO95 [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in
scanning]
6130-E P-341
 Cycle operation
17. The gauging result is judged to be tool breakage or tool wear.
specified.
6130-E P-342

[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
6130-E P-343
 Cycle operation
18. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool breakage or the tool wear are judged.
specified.
6130-E P-344

The tool breakage is detected at high-speed.
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
 Cycle operation
7. The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position.(When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in
infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
9. The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).
14. The gauging result is judged to be tool breakage.
specified.
6130-E P-345
7-6. Maker’s Subprogram for Gauging a Horizontal Spindle

Tool in the Fixed Sensor Mode
The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST. When
selecting the fixed sensor mode, turn on bit 3 of the variable.
A fixed sensor can gauge a horizontal spindle tool (an attachment tool) or a vertical spindle tool. The
sensor mode (horizontal/vertical) can be switched by bit 6 of the system-variable VFST. For gauging
a horizontal spindle tool, turn on bit 6 of the variable.
ME61315R0300900060001
Like the gauging cycles in the movable sensor mode, the horizontal tool gauging program in the
fixed sensor mode consists of the following sub routines:
OO32 Z- axis lowering position setting cycle
OO93 Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction
OO95 Gauging in the length wise direction
OO95 Tool breakage detection in the length wise direction
Refer to “6-3. Maker’s subprogram in the movable sensor mode” [Tool change position setting
cycle (OO31)].
[Z- axis lowering position setting cycle (OO32)]
For the gauging on extension attachments, the Z-axis lowering position has to been specified.
This OO32 cycle set this position. Refer to “Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET
6130-E P-346
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction (OO93)]

breakage.
CALL OO93 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]
PAT=* [PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
Normal setting data is PAXI=#02H.
scanning]
1. Install the reference tool. Set the attachment direction to the right on the user’s
responsibility.
works by Y-axis movement)
6130-E P-347
 Cycle operation
2. The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.
5. The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position.
6. The Y-axis moves to the under-travel position.
specified.
Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PRET is specified.
6130-E P-348

This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting the tool
breakage. The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No.23.
[POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PRI: Reference cutter radius
VEST: Sensor setting position
scanning]
1. Install the reference tool. Set the attachment direction to the right on the user’s
responsibility.
6130-E P-349
 Cycle operation
6. The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-
axis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
specified.
6130-E P-350
[Gauging in the length wise direction]

variable VFST.
CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning][Skip value in scanning]
PAT: Attachment off set number
6130-E P-351
 Cycle operation
5. The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position.
6. The Y-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.
specified.
6130-E P-352

PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
PSPN [PPIC][PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning]
PIN: Y-axis infeed amount
6130-E P-353
 Cycle operation
6. The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-axis shifts in
infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
specified.
6130-E P-354

This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of a ball end mill.
CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*]
PH: Tool length offset number, Cutter radius compensation number
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
PRE: Detected error
 Cycle operation
9. The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.
12. The Y-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position.
specified.
6130-E P-355

in the lengthwise direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.
CALL OO95 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
scanning]
6130-E P-356
 Cycle operation
16. The gauging result is judged to be tool breakage or tool wear.
specified.
6130-E P-357

PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
scanning]
6130-E P-358
 Cycle operation
6. The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-axis is
positioned at the shifting point from the sensor position by a distance specified with PIN.)
16. If the tool breakage is detected, the NC judges if the tool has been broken or worn.
17. If the judgment is tool breakage, the NC changes the tool according to the PGO setting.
specified.
6130-E P-359

The tool breakage is detected at high-speed.
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
 Cycle operation
6. The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-axis shifts in
feed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
8. The Z-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).
specified.
6130-E P-360
7-7. List of Alarms

2583 Alarm B UNTENDED: gauging sphere error over
Large errors were detected in measurement of sphericity.
In the sensor zero setting cycle, the sensor zero position in the horizontal direction did not
match the tool center.
Or, the measuring tool was defective.
[Measures to Take]
Use a proper tool, such as a spare tool.
2305 Alarm B UNTENDED: gauging impossible

Measurement became impossible during auto gauging cycle.
For this gauging system, the following codes are added to this alarm:
6A Sensor 4 OFF could not be confirmed in the first approach.
6B Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach.
6C Sensor 4 OFF could not be confirmed in the second approach.
6D Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach.
6E Sensor 4 OFF could not be confirmed in the third approach.
6F Contact could not be confirmed in the third approach.
70 Sensor 4 OFF could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.
71 Contact could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.
72 Sensor 4 OFF could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.
73 Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach of the skipping cycle.
75 Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach of the skipping cycle.
7B The first sensor could not be confirmed in the high-speed tool breakage detection
cycle.
7C The sensor could not be confirmed after skipping in the high-speed tool breakage
detection cycle.
95 In the plural measurement operations, the difference between the minimum and
maximum measured values exceeded the tolerance.
96 The attachment type does not match the gauging program number.
30° angular AT OO125, OO126, OO127, and OO129 are usable.
Vertical/Horizontal spindles
In execution of OO95, OO96, OO97, or OO99, no attachment is mounted, or the
attachment is not extension one, 90° angular one, or B-/C-axis one.
97 The attachment is not indexed to an angle where measurement is possible.
30° angular AT Not indexed to C270°
45° angular AT Not indexed to C270°
Vertical/Horizontal spindles 90° angular AT not indexed to C270°
B-/C-axis AT indexed to B90° but not indexed to C270°
98 The current attachment no. does not agree with the attachment swivel offset no.
(PAT).
6130-E P-361
99 The vertical/horizontal spindle tool command (bit 6 of VFST) is wrong.

“1” (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when no attachment was mounted or
an extension AT was mounted for vertical/horizontal spindle measurement.
Or, “0” (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when 90° angular AT or B-/C-axis
AT is mounted.
6130-E P-362
SECTION 8 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

ME61315R0301000010001
6130-E P-363
8-2. Outline
the sensor is installed: This gauging function is possible only with the fixed sensor type.
Y+
X+ Z+
ME61315R0301000020001
 Gauging program
8-3. Gauging with the Fixed Sensor

Movable sensor and fixed sensor can be switched with the setting at bit 3 of the system variable
VFST. To select the fixed sensor, set ON the bit 3 of VFST.
Perform this gauging by setting OFF the bit 6 of the system variable VFST.
6130-E P-364
8-4. Each Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor

The gauging subprogram for the fixed sensor consists of the following subroutines:
ME61315R0301000040003

CALL OO31
CALL OO33
6130-E P-365
[Spindle speed]
S=F/N
Here,
speed override.
F is the actual feedrate. If PFI (the 1st approach speed of the sensor) is not specified with an
argument, this value is 2,000 multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. If PFI is specified with
an argument, this value is the specified value multiplied by the cutting feedrate override.
[B-axis positioning function]
This function moves the B-axis to the machine zero before execution of the program for each
gauging cycle. Use this function when interference is anticipated between the workpiece and
the sensor during gauging.
NC optional parameter No. 36 bit 5 (POSITIONING 1: DOES, 0: DOES NOT)
[Setting a barrier]
There is an area in which the tool interferes with the sensor when a large-diameter tool is
attached to the spindle. A barrier must be set to avoid this.
For the setting of a barrier, see the attached manual “SECTION 9 SPECIAL BARRIER
FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC.”
This cycle determines the sensor position used to gauge the tool length and detect tool breakage.
Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here. The gauging results are stored
in the system-work coordinates No.20.
CALL 0093 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]
Normal setting data is PAXI=#05H. In the case of movable sensor, however, set the
X-axis position. Otherwise, the sensor interferes with the tool, damaging the
machine.
the difference between the reference tool length for relative position offset and the
reference tool length used for individual gauging. If they are the same, just specify 0.
If PRS is omitted and an M code for spindle rotation (M03 or M04) is specified, the
tool is measured while in rotation. When PRS is specified, the spindle is orient-
stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool. With out the above M code,
however, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool even
if PRS is omitted.
6130-E P-366
scanning]
measures the tool in both positive and negative directions. Without designation
of PSPN, the sensor cannot gauge the tool. The default pick feed for gauging is
0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Scanning gauging is intended for determining the maximum
tool length position.
When the measured value decreased, it is assumed that the subsequent
gauging data will no more in crease. This means the sensor does not need to
continue gauging before it covers the width of PSPN. The criterion for stopping
gauging is called skip value. The default is 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.).
ME61315R0301000040001

min).
6130-E P-367
1. install the reference tool.
 Cycle operation
5. The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when “1” is set at bit 5 of NC
optional parameter No. 36.
specified.
6130-E P-368

breakage.
[POVT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
scanning]
works by Y-axis movement.)
6130-E P-369
 Cycle operation
6. The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.
7. The X-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.
PIN.)
specified.
6130-E P-370

variable VFST.
CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]:Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in
scanning]
of times.
The average value obtained by several times of gauging is regarded as the
finally measured value.
times of gauging. Set the allowable range of the difference between the
maximum and minimum measurements (variation) at this parameter. The default
is 0.005 [mm] (0.00020 in.).
alarm).
6130-E P-371
Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range triggers another
gauging cycle or not. When retry is desired, set the number of retry times at
PRTY.
 Cycle operation
8. The sensor-air-blower is turned off.
specified.
6130-E P-372

[PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
scanning]
See the description of the zero setting cycle of the sensor for gauging in
lengthwise direction and the gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.
6130-E P-373
 Cycle operation
position shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
specified.
6130-E P-374

CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PRET=*]
PH: Tool length offset, cutter radius compensation number
PLI: Tool length
number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
direction.
6130-E P-375
 Cycle operation
12. Operation sequences No. 10 and 11 are repeated up to the gauging angle of 90°.
specified.
6130-E P-376

CALL OO95 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
PGO: Parameter for designating the action when tool breakage is detected
6130-E P-377
 Cycle operation
specified.
6130-E P-378

[PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
scanning]
6130-E P-379
 Cycle operation
specified.
6130-E P-380

This cycle measures the tool length for detecting broken tool at high speed. The high-speed
tool breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt
the sensor beam as shown in the right figure.
ME61315R0301000040002
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
set.
6130-E P-381
 Cycle operation
specified.
6130-E P-382
8-5. List of Alarms

[Measures to Take]

cycle.
detection cycle.
6130-E P-383
SECTION 9 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC
SECTION 9 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR

HORIZONTAL MC
9-1. Outline
If a non-contact sensor is mounted on a horizontal MC, there is an area in which the tool interferes
with the sensor when a large-diameter tool is attached to the spindle, and consequently the tool may
strike against the sensor.
To prevent the tool from striking against the sensor, a special barrier function is adopted.
This function is intended to limit the X-axis travel depending on the Y-axis position.
9-2. Detailed Specifications
9-2-1. Parameter Setting

Select the parameter setting mode.
Select [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) from the function menu.
The DISPLAY CHANGE popup window appears.
a. If the DISPLAY CHANGE popup window shows BARRIER (X, Y), select it to display the
BARRIER (X, Y) screen.
b. If not, select [F1] (MENU) from the function menu.

The MENU CHANGE popup window appears.
Using the page keys or [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] cursor keys, select BARRIER (X, Y).
When you select [F1] (check mark) from the popup function menu in the MENU CHANGE
popup window, a checkmark is set at BARRIER (X, Y). In this state, select [F7] (OK) from the
popup function menu in the MENU popup window to exit the MENU CHANGE popup window.
The DISPLAY CHANGE popup window is updated, and BARRIER (X, Y) is included in the pop-
up window. So, select it to display the BARRIER (X, Y) screen.
ME61315R0301100020001
6130-E P-384
Barrier (X, Y) Effective/Ineffective

Effective commands : Effective/Ineffective
Initial setting : Ineffective
P limit, N limit
Effective commands : SET, ADD
Setting range : -99999.999 to 99999.999
Initial value : 0.000
9-2-2. Setting Items

Enable or disable the special barrier function in the upper area of the screen.
When Effective is selected, set the barrier data in the table of the screen lower area.
In this table, set an effective range of X- and Y-axes. At “Y”, set the range where the X-axis travel is
limited, and at “X” set the X-axis travel range.
Note that the above X- and Y-axis ranges shall be set in the machine coordinate system.
Thus, a barrier alarm will occur when both of the following conditions are met.
 Barrier (X, Y) effective
 The Y-axis position in the machine coordinate system is within the set range.
 The X-axis position in the machine coordinate system is not within the set range.
6130-E P-385
9-2-3. Barrier Range Setting Example

When the parameters are set as shown in Figure 1, the barrier ranges are as shown in Figure 2.
ME61315R0301100040001
9-2-4. Barrier Alarm and Resetting Method

If the sensor enters a barrier range set by the special barrier function, the following alarm occurs:
1203 Alarm A Barrier 2
To reset his alarm, select the manual operation mode, enable the pulse handle, and reset the NC.
First of all, reset the alarm.
After the alarm has been reset, axis movement is possible only with the pulse handle. Move the
problem axis out of the interference range using the pulse handle. At the same time, the pulse
handle can move all the axes.
6130-E P-386
9-3. Alarms
9-3-1. Alarm A
1203 Barrier
If a non-contact sensor is mounted on a horizontal MC, there is an area in
which the tool interferes with the sensor when a large-diameter tool is
attached to the spindle.
On the parameter setting screen, set a barrier as the interference range of the
X- and Y-axes.
When (Barrier Y-axis N limit ≤ Y command value ≤ Barrier Y-axis P limit), the
alarm lamp lights in either of the following cases:
(Barrier X-axis N limit value ≥ X command value) or
(Barrier X-axis P limit value ≤ X command value).
[Index]
None
[Character-string]
None
[Code]
2: Special barrier function for horizontal MC

Incorrect X-axis or Y-axis command in the program
[Measures to Take]
Review the program.
A barrier check does not take place in the manual operation mode. When the
barrier alarm lamp is lit, select the manual operation mode and reset the
alarm. After resetting, axis movement is possible only with the pulse handle.
Move the problem axis out of the barrier range using the pulse handle.
6130-E P-387
SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

ME61315R0301200010001
* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the X-axis) and shifts
6130-E P-388
10-2. Outline
the sensor is installed: This manufacturer’s subprogram (hereinafter called the MSB) is for a fixed
sensor and can gauge vertical spindle tools.
ME61315R0301200020001
 Gauging program
10-3. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor

The movable sensor and fixed sensor can be switched by changing the setting at bit 3 of the system
variable VFST. To select the fixed sensor, set ON the bit 3 of VFST.
Since this MSB is used to gauge the vertical spindle tools, be sure to set OFF bit 6 of a system
variable VFST.
ME61315R0301200030001
Vertical spindle tool gauging is described below.

6130-E P-389
10-4. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for Gauging Vertical Spindle

Tools with the Fixed Sensor
The subprogram for gauging vertical spindle tools with the fixed sensor consists of the following
subroutines:
OO120 Position setting cycle for X-axis retract
CALL OO31
[X-axis retract position setting cycle (OO120)] (*Set this subroutine without fail.)
Use this subroutine when moving the X-axis into the machine after gauging.
* Set the X-axis position inside the machine when the ATC door is closed.
Procedure :
1 Move the X-axis to the position to be set as the X-axis retract position.
The positions of the Z- and Y-axes do not affect the setting.
2 Select the automatic operation mode and execute the following subprogram:
CALL OO120
M02
The X-axis does not move even if this program is executed.

After this program has been executed, the current X-axis position is registered as the X-axis
retract position at the system work coordinate system origin No. 12. It can be checked with
system variable VSZOX [12] on the check display screen.
6130-E P-390
[Spindle speed]
S=F/N
Here,
speed override.
The laser sensor mounting position of the double-column MC “MCR-AF” is outside the travel limit.
That is, gauging is performed in a range out of the control of the soft limit.
In the sensor zero setting cycle (OO93 or OO94) of this manufacturer’s subprogram, the spindle
is positioned in the sensor position, and it is, therefore, necessary for the operator to move it out
of the travel limit by manual interrupt.
Perform this operation with extreme care because it is very dangerous.
6130-E P-391

breakage.
[PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
the difference between the reference tool length for relative position offset and the
reference tool length used for individual gauging. If they are the same, just specify
0.
If PRS is omitted and an M code for spindle rotation (M03 or M04) is specified, the
tool is measured while in rotation. When PRS is specified, the spindle is orient-
stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool. With out the above M code,
however, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool
even if PRS is omitted.
scanning]
measures the tool in both positive and negative directions. Without designation of
PSPN, the sensor cannot gauge the tool. The default pick feed for gauging is 0.1
mm (0.004 in.). Scanning gauging is intended for determining the maximum tool
length position.
When the measured value decreased, it is assumed that the subsequent gauging
data will no more in crease. This means the sensor does not need to continue
gauging before it covers the width of PSPN. The criterion for stopping gauging is
called skip value. The default is 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.).
ME61315R0301200040001
6130-E P-392

Set the offset amount to VATSC [185, attachment offset number].Use this number
when performing the sensor zero setting cycle using an attachment.
This MSB is not applicable to the measurement of horizontal spindle tools and can
be used only for gauging of the tool mounted with an extension attachment.
min).
6130-E P-393
 Cycle operation
3. The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).
4. The program stops on reception of M00.
5. Select the manual interrupt mode and move the reference tool near the sensor.
The operator must perform the following operations:
 Turn ON manual interrupt mode.
 Manually move the reference tool close to the sensor (where the laser beam is
blocked simply by Z-axis movement).
 Turn OFF manual interrupt mode.
 Press the START button.
6. The shift is canceled.
8. The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position.
17. The X-axis retracts.
18. The sensor retracts.
19. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit).
6130-E P-394

breakage.
[POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
with PIN.
scanning]
6130-E P-395
 Cycle operation
4. The program stops on reception of M00.
5. Select the manual interrupt mode and move the reference tool near the sensor.
The operator must perform the following operations:
 Turn ON manual interrupt mode.
 Manually move the reference tool close to the sensor (where the laser beam is
blocked simply by X-axis movement).
 Turn OFF manual interrupt mode.
 Press the START button.
6. The shift is canceled.
10. The X-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.
PIN.)
6130-E P-396

variable VFST.
[PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*]
[PRTY=*]
PLI: Tool length
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]:Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning]
of times.
The average value obtained by several times of gauging is regarded as the finally
measured value.
[mm] (0.00020 in.).
alarm).
6130-E P-397
 Cycle operation
3. The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of
6130-E P-398

CALL OO96 PRI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
scanning]
radius.
6130-E P-399
 Cycle operation
position shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
6130-E P-400

CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*]
[PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PLI: Tool length
number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
direction.
Refer to the Gauging in the lengthwise direction.
6130-E P-401
 Cycle operation
6130-E P-402

CALL OO95 [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
[PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
Refer to the [Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction].
result.
1
PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. The broken tool moves
2 to the tool change position before being changed.
6130-E P-403
Refer to the [Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction].
Refer to the [Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction].
 Cycle operation
6130-E P-404

[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
6130-E P-405

 Cycle operation
6130-E P-406

This cycle detects the tool length breakage.The high-speed tool breakage detection is
executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the sensor beam as shown
in the right figure.
ME61315R0301200040002
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
Specify the tool off set number. When omitted, the active tool number is set.
6130-E P-407
 Cycle operation
6130-E P-408
10-5. List of Alarms

[Measures to Take]

cycle.
detection cycle.
7E The ATC door is not open.
81 When the Z-axis was lowered, the travel limit failed to become ineffective.
95 In several-times gauging, the difference between the maximum and the minimum
measurements exceeded the tolerance.
6130-E P-409
SECTION 11 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT

FUNCTION FOR 30°/45° AT

ME61315R0301300010001
6130-E P-410
11-2. Outline
Non-contact sensor gauging is classified into two methods:
Gauging with a sensor fixed at a desired position
Gauging with a movable sensor
Gauging the tool mounted in a 30°/45° angular attachment (hereinafter called a 30°/45° AT) is
possible only with the fixed sensor.
Movable sensor for gauging a vertical spindle tool
Fixed sensor for gauging a vertical spindle tool or horizontal spindle tool
for 30°/45° AT
ME61315R0301300020001
 Gauging program
6130-E P-411
11-3. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor

The movable sensor or fixed sensor can be switched by changing the setting at the bit 3 of the
system variable VFST. To gauge the tool mounted in a 30°/45° AT, set ON the bit 3 of VFST.
ME61315R0301300030001
6130-E P-412
11-4. Manufacturer’s Subprogram for 30°/45° AT Tool Gauging

by the Fixed Sensor
The subprogram for gauging the tools mounted in the 30°/45° AT with the fixed sensor consists of
the following subroutines:
30° AT
45° AT
6130-E P-413

CALL OO31
CALL OO32
[Spindle speed]
S=F/N
Here,
speed override.
6130-E P-414
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction (OO123, OO113)]

breakage.
Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here.
The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No. 25 for the tool mounted in
the 30° AT, or in the system work coordinates No. 26 for the tool mounted in the 45° AT.
CALL OO123 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=*
(OO113) [PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
For the absolute position offset (as mentioned earlier), specify the length from
the gauge line to the end of the reference tool. For the relative position offset,
specify the difference between the reference tool length for relative position
offset and the reference tool length used for individual gauging. If they are the
same, just specify 0.
If PRS is omitted and an M code for spindle rotation (M03 or M04) is specified,
the tool is measured while in rotation. When PRS is specified, the spindle is
orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool. With out the above M
code, however, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped
tool even if PRS is omitted.
measures the tool in both positive and negative directions. Without designation
of PSPN, the sensor cannot gauge the tool. The default pick feed for gauging is
0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Scanning gauging is in tended for determining the maximum
tool length position.
When the measured value decreased, it is assumed that the subsequent
gauging data will no more in crease. This means the sensor does not need to
continue gauging before it covers the width of PSPN. The criterion for stopping
gauging is called skip value. The default is 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.).
ME61315R0301300040001
6130-E P-415

Set the offset amount to VATSC [184, attachment offset number].
min).
1. install the reference tool.
moves by angular operation in the tool lengthwise direction.)
6130-E P-416
 Cycle operation
7. Locate the X-axis in the gauging start position.
specified.
6130-E P-417
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO124, OO114)]

breakage.
The gauging results are stored in system work coordinates No. 27 for the tool mounted in the
30° AT, or in system work coordinates No. 28 for the tool mounted in the 45° AT.
(OO114) [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
with PIN.
When calculating the sensor zero, however, set the tip of the reference tool as
the sensor zero by taking this Z-axis infeed amount into account.
moves at an upward angle of 90° from the lengthwise direction.)
6130-E P-418
 Cycle operation
6. Position the Y-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Y-axis in a
position shifted by the Y-axis component of PIN).
7. The X-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.
8. Position the Z-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Z-axis in a
position shifted by the Z-axis component of PIN).
specified.
6130-E P-419
[Gauging in the lengthwise direction (OO125, OO115)]

variable VFST.
CALL OO125 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*]
(OO115) [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*]
PLI: Tool length
* Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging
The offset must be set at VATSC [184, attachment offset designation number].
of times.
The average value obtained by several times of gauging is regarded as the finally
measured value.
[mm] (0.00020 in.).
6130-E P-420
alarm).
 Cycle operation
6. The Y-axis is positioned on the extension line from the sensor position in the tool
lengthwise direction.
12. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.*
specified.
6130-E P-421
[Gauging in the radial direction (OO126, OO116)]

(OO116) PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
Set a distance by which the Z-axis further advances from the original advanced
distance in the sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction.
radius.
Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the gauging
cycle in the lengthwise direction.
6130-E P-422
 Cycle operation
specified.
6130-E P-423
[Gauging the sphericity (OO129, OO119)]

CALL OO129 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*]
(OO119) [PCON=*] [PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PLI: Tool length
number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
direction.
6130-E P-424
 Cycle operation
12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.*.
specified.
6130-E P-425
[Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction (OO125, OO115)]

CALL OO125 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
(OO115) [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
result.
1
PGO= The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. The broken tool
2 moves to the tool change position before being changed.
6130-E P-426
 Cycle operation
specified.
6130-E P-427
[Tool breakage detection in the radial direction (OO126, OO116)]

(OO116) PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
Set a distance by which the Z-axis further advances from the original advanced
distance in the sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction.
See the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction, the gauging cycle in
the lengthwise direction, and the tool breakage detection cycle in the lengthwise
direction.
6130-E P-428
 Cycle operation
specified.
6130-E P-429
[High-speed tool breakage detection (OO127, OO117)]

This cycle measure the tool length to detect broken tool at high speed. The high-speed tool
breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the
sensor beam as shown in the right figure.
ME61315R0301300040002
CALL OO127 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*] [PRET=*]
(OO117) [PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
set.
6130-E P-430
 Cycle operation
9. The Y-axis and the Z-axis skip to the target position (sensor position + over travel
position).
specified.
6130-E P-431
11-5. List of Alarms

[Measures to Take]

cycle.
detection cycle.
96 The attachment type does not match the gauging program number.
Vertical/Horizontal spindles
In execution of OO95, OO96, OO97, or OO99, no attachment is mounted, or the
attachment is not extension one, 90° angular one, or B-/C-axis one.
97 The attachment is not indexed to an angle where measurement is possible.
30° angular AT not indexed to C270°
45° angular AT not indexed to C270°
Vertical/Horizontal spindles 90° angular AT not indexed to C270°
B-/C-axis AT indexed to B90° but not indexed to C270°
98 The current attachment no. does not agree with the attachment swivel offset no.
(PAT).
6130-E P-432
99 The vertical/horizontal spindle tool command (bit 6 of VFST) is wrong.

“1” (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when no attachment was mounted or
an extension AT was mounted for vertical/horizontal spindle measurement.
Or, “0” (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when 90° angular AT or B-/C-axis
AT is mounted.
LIST OF PUBLICATIONS
Publication No. Date Edition
6130-E November 2012 1st
6130-E-R1 September 2014 2nd
6130-E-R2 November 2014 3rd
Original Instruction Manual
This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or
design changes.
Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice.
If you require clarification or further explanation of any point in this manual,
please contact your OKUMA representative.

ME61 315 R03a

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ME61 315 R03a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GAUGING SYSTEMS

1. Precautions Relating to Installation

(2) Installation Environment

2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power

3. Precautions Relating to Operation

(8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool.

4. Precautions Relating to the ATC

6. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.

(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure

 MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)

(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure

a. Cleaning the cooling unit

 Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?

 Is the external air inlet blocked?

8. Symbols Used in This Manual

1-8-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset.......................................................................... 109

SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION ................................................122

2-8-3. End Face Gauging on Z-axis........................................................................... 190

SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE .................................................208

SECTION 4 MANUAL GAUGING..........................................................................211

SECTION 5 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION .............................................250

SECTION 6 CONTINUOUS TOOL GAUGING FUNCTION ..................................286

SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION ..........................307

7-2. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 308

SECTION 8 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR

SECTION 9 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC................383

SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR

SECTION 11 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30°/

11-5. List of Alarms ................................................................................................................. 431

SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/

 Specifications for automatic tool length offset only, and

(1) Automatic Tool Length Offset

(2) Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

1-1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging

1 Select an operation mode (automatic, MDI, manual).

2 Press function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE).

3 In the DISPLAY CHANGE window, select “GAUGING RESULTS”.

4 Press function key [F8] (CLOSE).

1-1-2. Function Menu

When the extend key is pressed.

The function menu relating to gauging result processing is described below.

Function Menu Description

TOOL/ZERO Function Key

1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3 Press function key [F2] (TOOL/ZERO).

MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key

1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3 Press function key [F4] (MSB ZERO ON/OFF).

MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key

1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3 Press function key [F5] (MSB TOOL ON/OFF).

SENSstat ON/OFF Function Key

1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3 Press function key [F6] (SENSstat ON/OFF).

VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key

1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.

2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.

3 Press function key [F7] (VARIOUS ON/OFF).